Home

flixo manual

1. Information Style 2 Information Style En ALL General Extended Font General Extended Font Name Y Show dimension Numbers V Show property Thousands delimiter Y Show minimal temperature I Show units V Show maximal temperature Show result symbols Y Show average temperature Indicator Line Type X End Point Markers Begin v End v Preview Preview Asphalt Aspnan E Am XITA MM A 293167890 12 mm am 1245123 in he 1245 12 Wi m K Bu 000E e 000 _ DC _ 2000 c 000 C 100 C FE A A Cancel OK Cancel Fields General Tab Name Here you define the name of the style You cannot leave this field empty the chosen name must be unique i e not identical to another existing name Aside from these limitations you are free to choose any name Digits Number of decimal places or significant digits which are Thousands delimiter Show units Line 206 to be displayed The kind Decimal Points or Significant you can select using the adjacent drop down list The digits left of the decimal point will be grouped into thousands The appropriate units will be shown after each numerical value The units can be adjusted in the Units tab of the Options dialog window In the Information style the units are always shown This setting group determines the characteristics of the label lines color style size and type Note that some of
2. by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 245 Reference Fields Name Type Value Add Name of the variables the name can either be chosen from the drop down menu or it can be added directly into the field Type of variable selected in the Name drop down menu Value of variable selected in the Name drop down menu Adds a new variable to the list or modifies the value of a variable if the name corresponds to an entry in the Properties list Modify Delete Properties 445 Various Dialog Windows 246 Deletes the entry marked in the Properties list Displays a list of all the defined variables In this chapter we shall discuss the various dialogs which have not been addressed in the other chapters About flixo Overwriting an old File Batchsolver Update Database Boundary Condition Temperatures Model Orientation Frame Materials Adjusting the Size Adapt Material Adapt Boundary Condition New File Document Templates Opening Pictures Page Setup Print Layers Materials Boundary Conditions Air Cavity Material New Components Calculation Fields Material Search Document Search Layer Material Assignment 3D equivalent Object Importing Constructions by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows 4 4 5 1 Exporting Pictures Materials and Boundary Conditions Protect Objects Protect Re
3. Resultat Objekt Model Modell 4 4 Isotherms 2 Style Isothermen uaa Temperature Field M Stream Lines E Heat Flux Density Field F ar rid Boundary conditions F Materials E Radiation properties F Mesh EJ Room temperatures F Graphic Objects 9 Material borders 7 Labels 7 4 Legends Material Legend F BC Legend M 4 Dimensior gt Re i Point x mm 25 000 y mm 120 000 Width mm 170 000 Height mm 140 000 Figure 1 Properties flyout of a result object Other properties of the result object e g display rulers optional border around the object line properties position within the place holder can be changed in the corresponding Style in the Styles flyout 86 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools Model Modell v Reference Point EEE hor Left ver Top Position and Dimension x y Wwe h Create Properties Style Resultats Objekt Extended Figure 2 Defining Styles The presentation of a result object can be defined in the Style list of the Result Object tool properties The list shows all styles that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new result object will always be created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list see figure 2 You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles flyout or in the Style drop down lis
4. Bold 6 7 Bold Italic 18 3 a gt 22 24 z Sample AaBbYyZz Script Westem Y 4 4 1 18 Font Tab Description Most of the aforementioned style dialog windows have a Font tab where you can edit the font properties Result Object Style e es General Postion Scaling Lines Labels Fort Font Font Style Size Arial Regular 10 ET 10 A al Black 7 Bold 11 E Arial Narrow Italic 12 Arial Rounded MT Bold Bold italic y Effects Strikethrough Underline Color MM See se eee EE by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 209 Reference Fields Font On the font tab you have a standard set of Windows font options With these settings you can edit the font settings The font tab has a preview pane where you can see how the settings will look in the document 4 4 2 Options Dialog Window In this section we will examine the Options dialog windows with which you can edit the various settings in FlixO pro These settings fall into three main categories e Application wide settings e Document settings e Current Page settings Model Master and Report pages cf the tabs on the lower edge of the work area The application settings are saved when you quit the program and are loaded again upon starting The settings affecting the current document or page are saved in the current
5. LY eS J E Application B Document eo 25 000 illi Special Materials Millimeter X Add Cavities 4000 m Calculation Move 3 Current Page Grid and Guidelines Clear Horizontal Guidelines Vertical Guidelines OK Cancel Fields List Shows all defined guidelines Add Adds a new guideline with specific coordinates Move Adjusts the coordinate of the selected guideline Delete Deletes the selected guidelines Clear Deletes all the guidelines in the list 4 4 3 Object Properties Dialog Window In the following paragraphs the various dialog windows which you can use to show and modify the properties of selected construction elements are described Every object on any given page of a flixo pro document is code bound to a dialog window The dialog window can be accessed with the context menu command right click Properties of the object or with menu command Edit Properties In the latter case the dialog window will be shown for the object which is currently active object Alternatively most of the properties can be adjusted in the Properties Flyout Here is a list of all the object properties windows which are described in this section e General Properties dialog window e Line Object Properties dialog window e Domain Object Properties dialog window Result Object Properties dialog window Frame or Joint U Value Properties dialog window Multiple Selection Properties dialog window 236
6. e Parallel Layers e Equivalent U Value e Frame Uf Value e Joint UTJ Value 100 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools How do use it The use meaningful application physical explanations and limitations of the calculation kinds are described in different chapters e U Value Tool Parallel layers e U Value Tool Equivalent U Value e U Value Tool Frame Uf Value e U Value Tool Joint UTJ Value e U Value Tool Roller Shutter Box Usb Value Defining Styles The presentation of an U value object can be defined in the Style list in the U Value tool properties see figure 1 The list shows all styles for U value objects that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new U value object will always be created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles flyout or in the Style drop down list in the U Value tool properties The styles can also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 Properties Kind Parallel Layers Style U Value ma m Extended Figure 1 U Value tool properties Oi e This tool can only be used on the report page and only if result objects of a previously calculated model are present 4 1 20 1 Parallel Layers Use Physics Limitations Description The U Value
7. 4 1 20 5 Roller Shutter Box U value Use Physics Limitations Description The U Value tool Roller Shutter Box U Value allows you to calculate and display roller shutter box U Values according to standard EN ISO 10077 2 How do activate it The U Value tool can be activated with the command U Value in the menu Results or by clicking on the Hr icon in the Toolbox flyout Then select Shutter Box Usb Value as kind in the tool properties cf figure 2 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 117 Reference How do use it Click with the tool on the result object for which the Usb Value should be calculated If Flixo pro recognizes the construction as a roller shutter box according to EN ISO 10077 2 then the Usb Value will be calculated and displayed otherwise a corresponding error message will be displayed For the calculation of the roller shutter box U value according to the European standard EN ISO 10077 2 following preconditions have to be fulfilled e Top of roller shutter box adiabatic e Atthe bottom of the roller shutter box where it adjoins the window frame adiabatic for a distance of 60 mm e Surface adjacent to the internal environment Surface resistance of 0 13 m K W e Surface adjacent to the external environment Surface resistance of 0 04 m K W The method to calculate the frame width Max of projections Cold side projection Warm side projection can be cust
8. Results Grid and Guidelines Guidelines Description The general settings of flixo pro are defined in the following dialog window Options Ser meas E Application i General User Interface Profile Default Save Database T emplates Program Launch Basic Units Action Show start page 52 8 Derived units 4 Data Exchange H Tools Document Model Special Materials i Cavities i Calculation i Results H Current Page Close start page after file load Miscellaneous low medium high System resource allocation Y Use resistance instead of h value v Automatic removal of all invisible results Auto Updates Edt Check by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 211 Reference Fields Profile Program Launch System Resource Allocation Use resistance instead of h value Automatic removal of invisible results Auto Updates Edit Auto Updates Check 212 Here you can select the current profile The standard template and the tools that should be hidden can be set in a profile In this list you can set the action that is performed when you launch flixo pro Create new default file Open most recent used file or Show start page On the Start Page you can either open one of the recently used files create a new default file or import a file If the option Close start page after file load is
9. Special Font 5 700 Style Type Style as Regular D Style as Highlighted User defined Style Style Preview aan a db Clear All by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch gt 185 Reference Fields General Tab Name Isotherms Isotherm labels Label distance Places after decimal point Thousands delimiter Show units Regular Tab First Temperature 186 Here you define the name of the style You cannot leave this field empty the chosen name must be unique i e not identical to another existing name Aside from these limitations you are free to choose any name Here you determine which isotherms will be displayed Show regular isotherms Isotherms with regular isotherm separation will be displayed The properties of this type of isotherm can be set in the Regular tab Show special isotherms Isotherms with freely definable temperatures will be displayed The temperatures and the properties of this type of isotherm can be set in the Special tab Show regular and special isotherms Both the aforementioned regular and special isotherm types will be displayed The characteristics of these isotherms can be set in the corresponding tabs Here you determine whether the isotherms should be labeled or not Here you can define an additional label separation distance Number of post decimal place holders in the isotherm label whic
10. Tools Physical Explanation The Y value is calculated as follows Da F c AT ir bape tUen Tem and calculated as follows if the heat flux through the section should be taken into account cf Properties flyout P a e DD Y 4 2 0 B A C D AT Usa bag Con Te where O heat flux from A to C counterclockwise W m heat flux from B to A counterclockwise W m O p heat flux from Cto D counterclockwise W m AT if there are only two boundary condition temperatures Temperature difference TA TB of the boundary condition temperatures TA and TB at the points A and B K AT if there are more than 2 boundary condition temperatures then the temperature difference will be calculated according to the rule defined in the Properties flyout Usa U value for the whole construction from A to E W m2K U U value for the whole construction from E to C W m2K length of the projection of the line segment AE on the perpendicular to the section line AB m l length of the projection of the line segment CE on the perpendicular to the section line CD m Comments e In general the Y values are dependent on the side of a construction interior or exterior for which the value is being calculated In particular the relational lines IA E and IC E can be different If the heat flux exceeds a critical relatively high value then the corresponding warning will be shown You can adjust this value
11. With the Select Move Scale toolor Edit tool respectively you can change the position of the label as well as the position of the section The type of label e g number of post decimal place holders whether the heat flux should be calculated through the section surface as well as the graphical properties of the cross section line can be adjusted with the corresponding styles in the Styles flyout 106 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools 2000 00 Figure 2 Physical Explanation The equivalent U value previously equivalent K value is calculated as follows D A B Ua RE Le E and calculated as follows if the heat flux through the section should be taken into account cf figure 4 Properties flyout tr mw Dist Dot Dip eABCABD 7 DAT where U equivalent U value W m2K O p heat flux from A to B counterclockwise W m O heat flux from Cto A counterclockwise W m heat flux from B to D counterclockwise W m b length of the projection of the distance line AB on the perpendicular to the section line AC m AT temperature difference TA TC of the boundary condition temperatures TA und TC by by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 107 Reference the points A and C K Comments e In general the equivalent U values are dependent on the side of a construction interior or exterior for which the value is being calcu
12. dimension U value and heat flux objects should be automatically added or not Highlight reference point Ifthis option is activated the position of the reference point is emphasized by an arrow Heat flux style By clicking on the Edit Style button a dialog window will appear where you can adjust the style of the heat flux help object By clicking on the Choose Style button a dialog window will appear where you can choose and apply a heat flux style The current settings of the selected style will be copied If the selected style is modified later it has no influence on the appearance of a Psi value object U value style By clicking on the Edit Style button a dialog window will appear where you can adjust the style of the U value help object By clicking on the Choose Style button a dialog window will appear where you can choose and apply a U value style The current settings of the selected style will be copied If the selected style is modified later it has no influence on the appearance of a Psi value object Dimension style By clicking on the Edit Style button a dialog window will appear where you can adjust the style of the dimension help object By clicking on the Choose Style button a dialog window will appear where you can choose and apply a dimension style The current settings of the selected style will be copied If the selected style is modified later it has no influence on the appearance of a Psi va
13. e Optionally you can assign automatically materials to the domains based on the layer of the domains The layer material assignment can be imported either from existing files or defined manually e You can open the layer material assignment dialog window by clicking the button in the DXF Import message line or by selecting the layer context menu item Materials O continue the tutorial you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top 3 3 3 Deleting unused Edges and closing Boundary Lines If individual edges and elements on the layer should be deleted then this is done with the usual techniques and commands Open line segments can be closed with special tools Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 3 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 35 Tutorials Summary Not needed lines can be selected and deleted with the Select Move Scale tool R i Open line segments can be closed with the Line tool and the Polyline tool E It s only possible to draw on visible layers O continue the tutorial you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top 3 3 4 Converting DXF Files and correcting Problem Spots The main step of the import process is the conversion of all DXF data which can be found on the visible layers Often not all line segments can be transformed to closed regions problem spots or conflicts need to be corrected manually Cli
14. A u Network File name hm_fenster dd z Files of type DXF Files dd m Template normal_EN Fields File name Name of the file you would like to import Filter for the different types of construction files The supported file types Files of type are the following DXF format dxf SVG format svg and ISO2 files con Template Template file which should be used as a basis for the imported data Options Activates the Import Options dialog window where for example the scale factor can be defined 277 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Reference 4 4 5 28 Exporting Pictures Description In this dialog window the properties of the picture export graphic file type resolution and the file path can be determined r w Save As Save in J Tutorials 67 P By T Name Datetaken Tags Size Rating y Zi logo_DE tif Recent Places Desktop m walter schmidli e Computer A y Network File name Glass tif v Save as type TIFF File if x Y Selected object only Resolution 150 dpi x Fields File Name Name of the file under which the picture will be saved Files of type File save format of the export If only the selected objects should be taken into account in the picture file then this option can be marked If this option is not marked then the whole report will be exported Selected obj
15. All properties of the copy are identical with the ones of the source if needed the properties can be adapted in the Material dialog window You can delete a material by selecting it and either clicking on the X icon or by using the context menu command right click Delete by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Flyout Grouping Materials into Categories If you are using many materials it makes sense to organize these into Groups or Categories Categories are comparable to file folders and directories this is why they have the same symbol Upon creation every document generates a General category You can create further categories by clicking on the icon in the flyout or by right clicking on an existing category or material for that matter and using the context menu command New Category The category is created within the selected category You can also define a name for this category To delete a category select the category and click on the X icon or use the context menu command right click Delete You can rename a category by selecting it and then clicking on the Ej icon or by using either the context menu command right click Edit or Rename Alternatively you can rename the category by selecting it and then clicking on it again to rename it just as you would rename a file under Windows Explorer Only empty categories can be deleted To move a material from one category to another you ca
16. Define System Resource Allocation 211 Defining the construction 18 Definition 87 105 109 113 117 Aquivalenter U Wert 112 116 119 Ctri Key 293 Draft Mode 293 Drag amp Drop 293 Equivalent U Value 107 299 flixo 7 Help Definition 87 105 109 113 117 ESC Key 293 Exterior Edge 293 fRSI Value 90 Graphic Objects 293 Grid 293 Guidelines 293 Interior Edge 293 Isotherm 293 Layer Object 284 Material Domain 293 Mesh 293 Numerical Solution 293 Parametrisiertes Objekt 293 Proof Mode 293 Shift Key 293 Snap to 293 Streamlines 293 Tab Key 293 Tooltip 293 U Value 100 104 Defintion Psi Value 121 Psi Value 2 Constructions 122 Psi Value 3 Constructions 126 Psi Value Edge Spacer 131 Delete 145 Delete corner point 62 Delete corners 59 Delete Style 167 Deleting a layer 159 Deletion of a Material 161 Dialog Layer Object 284 Dialog window 195 Boundary Condition legend style 199 Dimension 204 Frame U Value 195 Heat Flux density legend style 201 Information Style 205 Line Style 207 Material legend style 199 Psi Value 197 Region Style 208 Streamlines 191 Temperature legend style 201 Text Style 209 Uf Value 195 Usb Value 195 UTJ Value 195 U Value 193 300 Dimension line position 135 Dimension Style Properties 204 Dimension Tool 135 Dirichlet 264 Display Object Properties 145 Display Options 154 Display window list 157 Distance between two points 69 Division of cavities 228 Divisions of cav
17. E PMMA polymethylmet MM Polycarbonates 1 Thermal break a Weather 4 4 m gt 3 L Ej M C Bc Gc 898 Figure 1 Material flyout m Creation Modification Duplication and Deletion of Materials The following description is valid for both the top materials list current document and for the lower materials list database To create a new material click on the icon in the flyout Alternatively you can use the context menu command right click New Material The new material can be defined in the Material dialog window After you have defined the properties click on OK and the new material appears in the current category If you would like to modify the properties of an existing material select it in the list and click either on the E icon or use the context menu command right click Edit or double click on the material This opens the same dialog window that is used to define a new material You can now modify the properties of the material If you wish to rename a material you can do so by choosing the context menu command right click Rename You can also rename the material by selecting it and then clicking on its name just as you would rename a file under Windows Explorer To duplicate a material entry with an unique name click on the icon in the flyout Alternatively you can create a duplicate by using the corresponding command in the context menu right click on the source entry Duplicate
18. Fields Name Here you define the name of the style You cannot leave this field empty the chosen name must be unique i e not identical to another existing name Aside from these limitations you are free to choose any name Line This setting group determines the characteristics of the line color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm 4 4 1 16 Region Style Description This style is applied when you are working with the Rectangle or Ellipse tool Region Style LE Name Red black bordered Fill Coor M gt u Line iae P Cancel Fields Name Here you define the name of the style You cannot leave this field empty the chosen name must be unique i e not identical to another existing name Aside from these limitations you are free to choose any name Fill Here you define the filling color and the hatch for the object Line This setting group determines the properties of the line color style size and type Note that some of the lines can t be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm 208 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows 4 4 1 17 Text Style Description This style is used when you are working with the Text tool In the Text style dialog window a standard Windows Font dialog window is displayed L Font style Size 2
19. In the upper part of the selected directory the list of the flixo pro documents is visible in the lower part the preview of the selected documents cf file 1 The preview is only possible for files from the most actual flixo pro Documents ax C Users Rom Admi gt 2 A Y Ey C Users Rom Administrator Desktop _ Documentl _ tutorial5_psi2_en lL v Ca gce Ko ays Figure 1 Documents flyout Searching Files If you are searching for specific documents in the selected directory including subdirectories you can use the filter function 172 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Flyout Components Y i Name Window v Match whole word only Match case Order Sort by Name Ascending D Descending C Users Rom Admi y gt 4 44 Y Figure 2 Documents Search dialog window Figure 3 Toolbar To search for a document in the file list of the selected directory click on the 4 icon in the Flyout toolbar or use the context menu command right click Search The Documents Search dialog window appears Under Name you can enter the component name or part of the component name that you are looking for After you have defined the filter criteria click on OK and the filter results will be displayed in the component database window of the flyout You can switch in the component database window between the Filter Criteria and the Filtered
20. Moisture zone The critical surface humidity you can define in the Properties flyout of the min max temperaturobject Maximum temperature If this option is activated then the maximum temperature is shown next to the minimum temperature Average temperature If this option is activated then the average temperature will be shown next to the minimum temperature Line properties This setting group determines the properties of the surface edge line the condensation zone and the moisture zone color style size and type The line kind you can select using the Of drop down list Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm Font Tab 4 4 1 4 Isotherms Style Description This style is used when you have isotherms displayed You can edit both the graphical aspects of the isotherms as well as the isotherm separation You can also define isotherms with special temperatures 184 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Isotherms Style General Name Isotherms Show regular isotherms Show special isotherms Show regular and special isotherms Labels Show labels Label distance 0 000 Number Places after decimal point 0 Thousands delimiter Show units Isotherms Style a x General Regular
21. SEY Hr O NAO 208 TAE li a da 209 POM Tabs AA a a il AN er 209 Options Dialog Window uuussuunsnsnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 210 A AA 211 User InteraGe nava ARA 213 SAVES Al e SAN a a de test ao LO 214 Database Templatesi ii air kamen 215 Basic and Derived Units 24 0u0044444444000nnnannnnnnnannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 217 DXE IM POM atest A a ae nea 218 SUE IIMPOR EXPOrt rt OM ssa a ie A a ot os ls MN 221 MOOS Genetalisin 8 ive eet a e ada 222 Object Capturing tees TO 223 Result Object Toni ner BIRD 224 CAM A Rd nee iene MN e ed 226 Model 222i O ean eee aes pain eee a a ena ace aaa 227 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch flixo 7 Help Special Material ivi did hihi td 228 O NN 229 Call aia 231 ROSAS coin A AAA A AE A 233 Grid and Guldelines ui artists cd i e nd ah ida ida 234 A AN 235 Object Properties Dialog Window uuununsssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 236 General Properlies a A baie aaa 237 Eine Object Properties iii hell hiess 238 Domain Object Properties l iiaciia stan ari ii 238 Result Object Properties u 2 2 2 Me A ee 239 Frame or Joint U Value Properties 2444444000n44nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
22. Zoom to Material 70 150 Zoom to next conflict 36 42 Zoom to Selection 70 Zoom to Slection 150 Zoom Tool 70 310 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch
23. document If you want the document specific settings to apply to all documents then you want to create a document template with the desired settings cf tutorial 6 Program or document options can be set in several dialog windows In an Options dialog window you can adjust the parameters of inputs views and calculations You can activate an Options dialog window with the menu command Options in the menu Tools or by clicking on the El icon on the Standard toolbar The Options dialog window has the following layout On the left side the individual parameter pages are presented in a tree view On the right side the information of the active page is displayed figure 1 At the bottom the standard commands OK and Cancel are present as well Options Ca x 5 General User Interface Save Database T emplates Basic Units Derived units Data Exchange Tools B Document Model Special Materials Cavities Calculation Results Current Page Figure 1 Options dialog window 210 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Detailed information on the following Options dialog windows can be found in this chapter 4 4 2 1 General General User Interface Save Database Templates Basic and Derived Units DXF Import SVG Import Export Tools General Object Capturing Result Object Tool Cavity Wizard Model Special Materials Cavities Calculation
24. e Atemplate is saved with the command File Save As and also has to be saved as the file type flixo Templates flt O continue the tutorial you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top 3 6 5 Creating Template Based Documents Generally all Flixo pro documents are based on a template If while generating a new document you do not specify which template the document should be based on then the document is automatically based on the template Normal_DE flt You can only select a template if you generate the new document with the menu command File New If you use the Llicon to create a new document then it will automatically be based on the Normal_DE flt template Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 6 Summary e A new document based on a specific template can be generated with the command File New The template can be selected from the dialog window which then appears e Retroactively the layout of a report can be adjusted with the command File Template Because the adjustment cannot be reversed the document should be saved before any changes are made When changing a template the layout and all Result Object properties as well as the visible attributes and legends of the new template are assumed while all results generated with tools are deleted 52 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Parametric Objects 3 7 Parametric Objects In th
25. figure 3 and then click on the Crop button or activate this key and hit Return The size of the edges correspond to the sizes in the model and not to the current drawing scale of the result object by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 83 Reference Undo Cropping To undo a crop choose either the menu command Undo cropping from the context menu right click on the cropped result object or by clicking on the Remove button in the Crop tool properties see figure 3 E i 146C a i E i a O Figure 1 Figure 2 Cropping Left 10 000m Top 20 000 m Right 300 000 Bottom 25 000 m Remove Cancel Properties Extended Figure 3 On e Only Result objects can be cropped 4 1 15 Result Object Tool Use Description With the Result Object tool you can create a result object on report pages and on the Master Reports displaying different results such as temperatures or isotherms 84 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools How do activate it The Result Object tool can be activated with command Result Object in the menu Results or by clickmg on the aE icon in the Toolbox flyout When the tool is active the mouse becomes iT How do use it After you have activated the Result Object tool you can define a result object through two corner points of a rectangle that lie diagonally to each other Cli
26. frame This setting group determines the properties of highlighted isotherm lines color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm Here you can define the temperatures of special isotherms All special temperatures are shown in the list A temperature will only be added after you click on the Add button A temperature will only be changed after clicking the Update button In this setting group you can define the graphical properties of special isotherms You can either use the properties of the regular or highlighted isotherms cf Regular tab Alternatively a special user defined style can be selected which you can define in the Style group below The settings will only be applied after clicking on Add or Update This setting group determines the properties color thickness type style of the special user defined isotherms The temperature corresponds to the appropriate edit field The settings will only be applied after you click on Add or Update by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 187 Reference Add Update Delete Clear All Font Tab 4 4 1 5 Vector Style Description Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm Adds a new special isotherm to the list The temperature is taken from the edit field and the style from the settings described above is applied Ch
27. if the frame width can t be exactly defined with the materials e g Z Profiles you can also adapt the dimension manually by moving the position of the start points of the dimension objects using the Select Move Scale tool or the Edit tool respectively You can also change the text positions of the help objects of the U values of the base construction and the dimension lines with the same tool Defining Styles The presentation of an Uf value object can be selected in the Style list in the tool properties cf figure 3 The list shows all styles for Uf value objects that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new Uf value object is always created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list You can either change the selection of the styles inthe Styles flyout or select the according style in the Style drop down list of the tool properties The styles can also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function cf tutorial 1 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 111 Reference Properties Kind Frame Uf Yalue y Style U Value extended Figure 3 Tool Properties Physical Explanations The frame U value is calculated according to EN ISO 10077 2 as follows b p Figure 4 Calculation of Uf values amp Ub AT Po b 1 with Total heat flux in to or out of the model
28. selected any open Start Page closes automatically after loading a file This controls the priority of the calculation process the higher the priority the more system resources will be allocated to the calculation process Note that other applications may take a performance hit Determines whether boundary condition input and outputs should use resistance rather than h values The resistance is the reciprocal of the h value Determines whether invisible results should automatically be deleted while loading Adjusts the settings for the automatic control for existing updates and service releases Here the check frequency and downloads folder can be determined Checks if the installed version of flixo pro is the most recent version and if other updates and service releases exist The frequency of the check can be adjusted in the options A For Auto Updates you need access to the Internet A For update checks you need write permissions for the downloads folder by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows 4 4 2 2 User Interface Description In the User Interface options dialog window you can determine the settings pertinent to the user interface Options Y 8 B Application General a Interface General ave Language 7 Database T emplates English Basic Units V Use customized flyout layout Derived units 4 Show description of empty field functions D
29. the menu toolbar and change the drop down menus Displays the Options dialog window by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Menu Commands 4 2 6 1 Tools Menu Submenu Protection Protect Object Protect Report Protect Document 4 2 7 Results Menu dE Result Object Material Legend BC Legend amp Temperature Protects a parametric object selectively against certain changes In the appearing dialog window you can determine which changes to protect the object against and define an optional password You can also remove the object protection If necessary the password will be requested in a dialog window Protects a report selectively against certain changes In the appearing dialog window you can determine which changes to protect the report against and define an optional password You can also remove the report protection If necessary the password will be requested in a dialog window Protects a document selectively against certain changes In the appearing dialog window you can determine which changes to protect the document against and define an optional password You can also remove the document protection If necessary the password will be requested in a dialog window Activates the Result Object tool Inserts a material legend into the active result object The graphical properties of material legends can be set in the corresponding dialog window
30. 1 20 3 Frame U Value Use Physics Limitations Description With the U Value tool Frame U Value you can calculate and display Frame Uf Values according to EN ISO 10077 2 How do activate it The U Value tool can be activated with the command U Value in the menu Results or by clicking on the HHF icon in the Toolbox flyout Then select Frame Uf Value as kind in the tool properties cf figure 3 How do use it Click with the tool on the result object for which the Uf value should be calculated If flixo pro recognizes the construction as a frame according to EN ISO 10077 2 then a dialog window opens For the calculation of the window frame U value according to the European standard EN ISO 10077 2 the glass unit has to be replaced by a panel cf figure 1 with the following characteristics e The thickness of the panel should correspond to the thickness of the glass unit e The thickness of the air cavity between the panel and the frame cf b1 should at least be 5mm thick e The glass unit rebate cf b2 of the panel should be 15 mm at the most e The visible part of the panel cf bp should at least be 190 mm e According to EN ISO 10077 1 the measurements b2 and bp should correspond to the larger of the two projected widths of the frame section without taking into account the stripping between the frame and glass unit or panel cf figure 1 e The thermal conductivity of the panel should be 0 035 W mK by infomind
31. 20 000 Interior heat flux downwards 20 000 Interior normal horizontal Interior heat flux upwards 20 000 Exterior normal 10 000 Exterior ventilated 10 000 Interior frame 20 000 I Exterior frame 0 000 Cancel Fields OK Assumes all new temperatures and adjusts all values of the boundary conditions Cancel Cancels the entire action No temperatures will be changed 4 4 5 6 Model Orientation Description For EN ISO 673 standard materials with temperature dependent thermal conductivities cf Materials the orientation must be known if a calculation is to be made You can define the model orientation before hand in the Model Options dialog window Orientation CY Ss There are material properties which will be calculated iteratively The properties depend on the orientation of the model Please define whether the model represents a horizontal section of a construction or a vertical section Vertical Undefined by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 251 Reference Fields Horizontal section The model is a horizontal section of a construction Vertical section The model is a vertical section of a construction Cancel Cancels the calculation action 4 4 5 7 Frame Materials Description For the automatic calculation of window frame U values Uf Value cf also tutorial 4 and joint U values UTJ Value cf also tutorial 5 all frame
32. Basic Techniques 3 1 5 Starting the Calculation and Displaying the Results in a Report Before you can display the results in a report and print them the construction needs to be calculated Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 1 Summary e The calculation can be started with the command Calculate from the menu File or by clicking on the P icon in the standard toolbar Depending on the selected options the first report page is activated after a successful calculation The reports are based on a template see tutorial 6 Both General results such as Isotherms Legends and object specific results exist General results for the selected result object can be predefined in a template with a menu command see Results with the result object context menu or with the Properties flyout Object specific results are prompted with specialized tools Results are prompted and displayed on a result object see Result Object tool aE Result objects can also be cropped see Crop tool e Report pages can be inserted and deleted The appearance properties of the results are defined with styles which are arranged in the Styles flyout iz Styles can be assigned with the Drag amp Drop function Styles can be adjusted as well 3 2 Advanced Techniques In the first introductory tutorial Basic Techniques you have learned how to create models with rectangular domains In this tutorial you will learn a few new techni
33. Database Templates Basic Units Derived units 3 Data Exchange DXF Import SVG Import Export Tools General Object Capturing Result Object Tool Cavity Wizard Document Model Special Materials Cavities Calculation Materials Surfaces Default Name Unventilated cavities Unventilated air cavity Slightly ventilated cavities Slightly ventilated air cavity 42 Fill small domains with critical material Epsilon Fields Unventilated cavities Slightly ventilated cavities Fill small domains with critical material 226 Name of the unventilated cavity material according to EN ISO 10077 2 which is used by the cavity wizard to create unventilated cavities If the material is not present in the document you will be prompted to choose or newly define a material in a corresponding dialog window This setting is dependent on the User Interface language Name of the slightly ventilated cavity material according to EN ISO 10077 2 which is used by the cavity wizard to create slightly ventilated cavities If the material is not present in the document you will be prompted to choose or newly define a material in a corresponding dialog window This setting is dependent on the User Interface language If the option is marked small cavities see also Special Materials will be assigned this critical material rather than the unventilated cavity material In a later by infomin
34. Flux Density tool allows you to display the value and the direction of the heat flux density at any given point on a result object How do activate it The Heat Flux Density tool can be activated with the command Heat Flux Density in the menu Results or by clicking on the a icon in the Toolbox flyout How do use it The use of the Heat Flux Density tool is comparable with that of the Temperature tool As soon as you move the mouse over the result object the heat flux density of a given spot is displayed To lock this value click on the desired spot with the mouse button This will create a label and an arrow indicating the direction of the heat flux density see figure 1 With the Select Move Scale tool or Edit tool respectively you can change the position of the label as well as the position of the start and endpoints The type of label e g the number of post decimal placeholders as well as the visual characteristics of the arrow can be changed by using the corresponding Style in the Styles flyout Figure 1 Heat Flux Density tool The horizontal and vertical rate of the local heat flux density are additionally displayed in Properties flyout cf figure 2 96 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools Properties AX amp Selected Object Name Style Vektor ma Results Heat Flux Density W 8 70151 eat Flux Density hor 1 72852 eat Flux Density ver
35. Materials flyout a The materials from the database can be found in the lower part and the materials present in the document in the upper part of the flyout e You can assign materials with either the Drag amp Drop function or with the Assign Properties tool e With the Assign Properties tool ey the selected material from the upper materials list is assigned to the construction Independently from the active tool you can assign a material from either the materials database or from the list of materials present in the document with the Drag amp Drop function e Inthe material database you can also search for materials see Materials flyout toolbar 28 You can choose to either have the database filtered or not filtered see Materials flyout toolbar W e New materials can either be added to the upper materials list or to the materials database see Materials flyout toolbar D O continue tutorial 1 you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top 3 1 4 Defining Boundary Conditions When assigning boundary conditions you only define the starting point of the boundary condition This boundary condition is valid until the starting point of the next boundary condition On an exterior surface boundary conditions run counterclockwise for interior boundaries boundary starting points run clockwise e g hollow objects like chimney floor heating systems etc In the next step you will assign 6 boundary conditions In the figure be
36. Properties dialog window File name and optionally the file path of the document Template on which the document is based The value will be taken from the document properties cf File Properties dialog by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 271 Reference 272 EN ISO 10077 2 Version Created Date Company Hyperlink Category Comments Manager Program Version Document Relative Heat Flux Error Result as Value Object Page Page Title Saved Date Keywords Sum of absolute Heat Flux Subject Title window Version of the standard EN ISO 10077 2 which is used to calculate the equivalent conductivities of cavities Date and optionally the time when the document was created The company of the document The value will be taken from the document properties cf File Properties dialog window Hyperlink element By clicking on the element the corresponding URL will be activated and displayed in a web browser The category s of the document The value will be taken from the document properties cf File Properties dialog window The comments on the document The value will be taken from the document properties cf File Properties dialog window The manager of the document The value will be taken from the document properties cf File Properties dialog window Program version of flixo pro the last time the file was saved with Relative heat flux
37. Rectangular Domain Tool Centric Creation 72 Keyboard 72 Square 72 Rectangular Material Domain Enter 26 Rectangular Shaped Cross Section 54 Redo 145 Redo Zoom 150 Reference Point 59 Refresh Results 155 Region Style Properties 208 Relative Coordinates 75 Relative position of the labels 135 Remove Protection 155 Report Page 19 305 flixo 7 Help Reports 16 19 create 31 Result Object Style Properties 176 Result Object Tool 84 Standard properties 224 Results activate 31 display 31 show 19 Retrieve Lokale Temperatur 87 Retrieve Temperature 87 Roller Shutter Box U Value 117 Room Humidity 87 Rotate 64 Rotate 90 CCW 152 Rotate 90 CW 152 Rotation 64 oo Same Dimension Height 154 Width 154 Width and Height 154 Same Height 154 Same Size 154 Same Width 154 Save All 143 Save document template 51 Saved Date 270 Saving a File 143 Scale Lock Aspect 59 Scale whole construction 253 Scaled Drawing 218 Scaling 176 Scaling mismatch 253 Screw 54 149 276 Search Styles Sort Views 167 Searching the Material Database 161 Select 59 All Objects 147 Boundary Condition 147 Dimensions 147 Graphical Objects 147 Groups 147 Guidelines 147 Material Domains 147 Parametric Objects 147 306 Results 147 Text 147 Select All 145 147 Select All Objects 147 Select Boundary Conditions 147 Select Dimensions 147 Select Graphical Objects 147 Select Groups 147 Select Guidelines 147 Select Material Domains 14
38. Scale tool inherit additionally all functions of the Edit tool from the previous versions the Edit Tool is obsolete Most of the properties from the selected objects can be adjusted directly in the Properties flyout like e g the Result object Document flyout in order to search and manage the flixo pro documents documents of the version 6 have a preview Message bar with comments and contextual commands above the document window the zoom to conflict tool is replaced by specific message bars The commands Calculate and Batch Calculations are moved to the menu File The polylines of the set boundary conditions can be displayed optionally as a preview the display occurs time delayed without influencing the continuation of the work Cutting regions can be limited to selected objects Miscellaneous The applied boundary conditions on Glazing objects remain also after editing the settings in the dialog window Display of the total width of the Glazing object in the dialog window The calculation of the construction can also be started on the report pages When copying an object the surface temperatures of a Min Max Temperature object are copied into the clipboard in CSV format and can for example be inserted in a table calculation program with the menu command Edit Insert Content and additionally be displayed as a diagram Beside the orthogonal dimension also coordinate dimension can be created by the Dimension tool Components can be displayed fi
39. Stream Lines 155 Temperature Field 155 Uf Value 155 Activate Air Cavity EN ISO 10077 2 Tool 150 Activate Align Grid 152 Guidelines 152 Objects 152 Activate Boundary Condition Tool 150 Activate Dimension Tool 150 Activate Ellipse Tool 150 Activate Elliptical Domain Tool 150 Activate Information Tool 150 Activate Line Tool 150 Activate Polygon Domain Tool 150 Activate Polyline Tool 150 Activate Rectangle Tool 150 Activate Rectanlge Domain Tool 150 Activate Snap Grid 152 Guidelines 152 Objects 152 Activate Text Tool 150 Activate Toolbox 173 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Activate Tools Air Cavity EN ISO 10077 2 150 Assign 154 Assign Properties 154 Boundary Condition 150 Crop 154 Cut 154 Dimension 150 Edit 154 Ellipse 150 Elliptical Domain 150 Information 150 Line 150 Measure Distance 154 Move 154 Polygon Domain 150 Polyline 150 Protect 154 Rectangle 150 Rectangle Domain 150 Rotate 154 Rotation 154 Scale 154 Select 154 Text 150 Adapt Document Template 256 Adjust Boundary Condition 147 Material 147 Size 147 Adjust Boundary Condition 147 Adjust Document Properties 143 Adjust edge length 62 Adjust Material 147 Adjust Options 154 Adjust Order 152 Adjust Scale 147 Adjust Settings 154 Adjust Size 147 Adjust Units 217 Adjust User Interface 154 Air Cavities Automatic division 42 Air cavities according to EN ISO 10077 2 39 Air Cavity 266 Air Cavity Material 261 26
40. Uf value according to EN ISO 10077 2 respectively for the automatic calculation of joint U values UTJ value according to EN 13947 A not select seal materials between the frame glass units and or panel which were used instead of the glass units Cancels the entire action no U value will be calculated The size of the entire construction can be adjusted by defining the size for a single domain Size i LY X Current Size Width 70 700 v Cancel Height 24 200 Millimeter New Size Width 70 700 Millimeter Height 24 200 Millimeter Fields Current Size New Size Cancel In this group the width and the height of the circumscribing rectangle are shown Here you can either enter the new width or the new height of the circumscribing rectangle The second value will be calculated automatically so that the ratio between the two values remains the same The entire construction then is enlarged or reduced according to the factor new width to old width Cancels the entire action the size of the construction will not be altered by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 253 Reference 4 4 5 9 Adapt Material Description The materials of the entire construction can be adapted by defining the new material and the material which is to be replaced Adapt Material e N U _X Current Material Polystyme De New Material Panel Z ca
41. View settings by clicking on the W icon in the Flyout toolbar or by using the context menu command right click Filtered View Defining Start Directory You can adjust the Start Directory for displaying flixO pro documents Enter the directory path into the control field in the Flyout toolbar or click on the button in the toolbar cf figure 3 You can select the directory in the dialog window 4 3 7 Toolbox Flyout Description In the top part of the Toolbox flyout you can select a tool while in the bottom part you can enter respective tool values via keyboard and adjust the tool properties by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 173 Reference Tools R Select Move Scale Rotate a Assign Properties 77 Crop Q Zoom Results JE Result Object amp Temperature E Min Max Temperature in Heat Flux Density Ie Heat Flux HE U Value He Equivalent U Value W Psi Value To Dimension i Information f l Ob je cts Line C Polyline O Rectangle Ellipse A Text Position x y Modi Properties Figure 1 Toolbox flyout The use of the individual tools is described in detail in the corresponding chapters 4 3 8 Properties Flyout 174 Description In the Properties flyout the properties of the currently selected object document material boundary condition or component are displayed by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 80
42. W m AT Temperature difference K U U value of the panel W m K b Width of the panel m b Width of the frame m If the calculated construction is a mullion or a transom than 2 panels are used instead of the glazings the formula is as follows 112 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools 4d Limitations This option is only available for constructions which are recognized as window frame according to EN ISO 10077 2 e The thermal conductivity of the panel is 0 035 W mK e The visible part of the panel is at least 190 mm e There are exactly 2 boundary condition temperatures e There are exactly 2 adiabatic boundary conditions Symmetry Model Section each one on both model sections e Either it s a horizontal or a vertical window 4 1 20 4 Joint U Value Use Physics Limitations Description With the U Value tool Joint U Value you can calculate and display Joint U Values according to EN 13947 How do activate it The U Value tool can be activated with the command U Value of the menu Results or by clicking on the HHF icon in the Toolbox flyout Then select Joint UTJ Value as kind in the tool properties cf figure 3 How do use it Click with the tool on the result object for which the Joint U value should be calculated Unlike to the Uf value the given construction including glazing and spacer is analysed Then the frame materials which define the frame me
43. a new window A submenu with commands to calculate the temperature distribution of either all not calculated constructions all constructions or a selected construction Allows the calculation of several constructions at the same time The definition of the files to be calculated along with the activation of the calculation is done through a special dialog window Deletes the mesh and calculation data of the current construction Imports files of various formats DXF files SVG files and ISO2 files can be imported The file type can be changed in the corresponding dialog window from the list File Type From the list Template the file template can be defined as the basis for the document to be imported DXF file imports are explained in Tutorial 3 Exports the current report page as a graphics or a SVG file You can also choose to export only the selected objects The type of file can be changed in the corresponding dialog window from the list File Type Here you can also define the resolution of the picture for the graphics file formats Exports the temperature landscape of the current result object to the called program This command is only active when the file was directly imported from another program Closes the active document Saves the active document If the file is being saved for the first time then a file dialog window appears where the file name and directory path can be defined Save as saves the file in
44. adjusted in the Units tab of the Options dialog window The appropriate symbol dependent on the type of value will be shown before each numerical value Here you determine whether the label line should be a simple or an orthogonal right angle bent line This setting group determines the properties of label lines color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm Here you can determine how the end of both label lines should look like There are two drop down lists that show the different possibilities This style is used when working with the Heat Flux tool The Heat Flux style consists of an object edge line and a label line by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 189 Reference Boundaries Style Le Erweitert General Extended Font Algemein ert Schit Linie at flux 3 Numbers Digits 3 Dicke 0 200 Millimeter v Thousands delimiter V Show units Art x Y Show result symbols Indicator Style Line Z Line Weight 0 200 Millimeter Z Type v End Point Markers Begin End en v Preview Voransicht 293 169 Wim f 293 168 W m Cancel Fields General Tab Name Digits Thousands delimiter Show units Show result symbols Style 190 Here you define the name of the style You cannot leave this field empty the chosen name must be
45. always created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles flyout or in the Style drop down list in the Psi Value tool properties The styles can also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 133 Reference Properties Type Edge Spacer v Style PsiValue extended v Figure 2 Tool Properties Physical Explanation The Y value according to EN ISO 10077 2 is calculated as follows b br Figure 4 Calculation of spacer Psi value Y U b Ub AT if it is a mullion or a transom with 2 glazings and 2 spacers the formula is as follows U b U b U b AT aga rtrt gg Y 2 with OQ Total heat flux in to or out of the model W m AT Temperature difference K U U Value of the panel W m K b Width of the glazing or the panel m b Width of the frame m O Limitations e This tool can only be used on the report page and only if result objects of a previously 134 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools calculated model are present e The Uf value of a frame according to EN ISO 10077 2 cf U value tool kind Frame U Value must already be calculated using type Automatic and saved in a file e The orientation o
46. and enables the creation of labels containing this information How do activate it The tool can be activated with the command Information in the menu Insert or by clicking on the 2 icon in the Toolbox flyout How do use it As soon as you move the mouse over a result object information about the material domain and the boundary condition edges will be displayed To record this information along with more detailed information in the report click on the respective spot This creates a label which you can move while keeping the mouse button pressed down see figure 1 If you would like to interrupt the labeling process hit the ESC key The type of label e g the number of post decimal placeholders optional display of min max temperatures optional display of the measurements along with the graphical properties of the label lines can be adjusted by using the corresponding Styles in the Styles 136 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools flyout With the Select Move Scale tool or Edit tool respectively you can change the position of a label as well as its reference point Innen Standard 20 C Unbel ftete Hohlr ume Eps 0 5 s 804 5 mm A 414 2 mm 8 200 C 4 0 0 Wim K h 7 7 Wi m K 0 3 6 4229 C F 134C 8 14 5 C Es 6 2121 C r 133C Figure 1 Labeling of a material domain and a boundary condition line Defining Styles The presentation of an information o
47. as in other Windows programs Functions that are used often are found on the toolbars on the active dialogs or can be activated through the context menu commands right click on objects You can hide or unhide a symbol toolbar by right clicking on an active toolbar and by de selecting the desired toolbar or by using the menu command Toolbars in the menu View You can customize your toolbars with the menu command Customize in the Toolbars menu Subjects in this chapter e File Processes File Menu e General Editing Edit Menu e Display Settings View Menu e Inserting Objects Insert Menu Arranging Objects Arrange Menu Selecting Tools Tools Menu Setting up a Report Results Menu e Window Management Window Menu e Help Help Menu 4 2 1 File Menu 1 New Creates a new flixO prodocument based on a document template The document template can be chosen from a dialog window The creation of a new document template is explained in Tutorial 5 Open Opens a flixo pro document from a volume Recent Files Displays a list of the recently used files Select the desired by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 143 Reference 144 gt Calulate Batch Calculations Remove Calculation 4 Import Export Export to Close lel Save Save As H save All J Print amp Print Preview Page Setup Send Template file and it will open in
48. at least three corner points e Itis not possible to create edges where one edge of a domain cuts across another edge of the same domain 4 1 11 Air Cavity EN ISO 10077 2 Tool Use Limitations Description With the Air Cavity EN ISO 10077 2 tool you can create air cavity material domains according to the EN ISO 10077 2 standard You can also assign emissivities long wave radiation properties at the surface of cavities according a material surface properties table Material Surface Undefined Mat Epsilon 0 9 IB Polyamid 6 6 w Epsilon 0 9 Aluminium Si Epsilon 0 1 E EPDM ethylen Epsilon 0 9 A Panel Epsilon 0 9 B iien Epsilon 0 9 Elastomeric foa Epsilon 0 9 Figure 1 Material Surface Properties table The assignment of the surface emissivities is only possible if the emissivities of the air cavities are calculated by flixo pro cf Cavity Options dialog window and are not directly defined by the air cavities materials cf Material dialog window How do activate it The Cavity Wizard can be activated with the command Air Cavity in the menu Insert or by clicking on the X icon in the Toolbox flyout When the tool is active the mouse cursor I becomesa How do use it Generating Cavities With the Cavity Wizard you define the material domains in which air cavities should by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 77 Reference automatically be created acc
49. be copied If the selected style is modified later it has no influence on the appearance of an U value object By clicking on the Edit Style button a dialog window will appear where you can adjust the style of the U value help object By clicking on the Choose Style button a dialog window will appear where you can choose and apply a U value style The current settings of the selected style by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows will be copied If the selected style is modified later it has no influence on the appearance of an U value object Dimension style By clicking on the Edit Style button a dialog window will appear where you can adjust the style of the dimension help object A dialog window will appear where you can adjust the style of the dimension help object By clicking on the Choose Style button a dialog window will appear where you can choose and apply a dimension style The current settings of the selected style will be copied If the selected style is modified later it has no influence on the appearance of an U value object Font Tab 4 4 1 10 Psi Value Style Description This style is applied when you are working with the Psi Value tool by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 197 Reference Psi Value Style Ba x General Font Name EE Numbers Digits ye Decimal Points z V Thousands delimit
50. be needed for the automatic calculation of the window frame U value Uf Value according to EN ISO 10077 2 respectively the the joint U value UTJ Value according to EN 15012631 In tutorial 4 the Uf value calculation is described in more detail Tutorial 5 explains how to calculate UTJ Value Noo not select any sealant material between the frame and the panel which is used for glazing purposes The dialog window for the multiple selection is displayed if the selection includes more than one object The dialog window has only one General tab indicating general object characteristics by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 241 Reference Multiple Selection Properties Le S General Tye Style Layer Layer 0 Bounding Rectangle X 22 500m y 233 834 Width 175 000 Height 143 874 U cms 4 4 4 File Properties Dialog Window 4 4 4 1 242 In this chapter the properties of a flixo pro file are described in detail Knowledge of these properties will help you when doing advanced Windows Explorer computer or network searches You can activate the same dialog window by prompting the properties of a file in Windows Explorer You can also add the properties as a field object to the current document More information on field objects can be found in the chapter Fields Below you will find information on the various tabs in the
51. be replaced by an appropriate panel Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 4 Summary e The Uf value can be calculated for constructions that fulfill all the conditions of the standard e The calculation of the Uf value is started for the selected result object by choosing the menu command Results U Wert gt Frame Uf Value or by activating the context menu command of the specific result object or by selecting the result object with the U Value tool Frame U Value In the Uf Value dialog window that appears all frame materials without stripping s are determined e The frame materials and other properties which influence the calculation can be adjusted in the Properties flyout 3 5 Psi Value and U Value Calculations In this tutorial the calculations of Psi values and U values of some typical flixo pro applications are explained 44 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Psi Value and U Value Calculations The goal of these examples is to illustrate the Psi Value tool and the U Value tool and to show typical cases where these tools are used in a meaningful way A Psi value is mainly a value of adjustment during the calculation of energy loss of building surfaces It quantifies the additional energy loss per degree Kelvin and linear meters which wasn t taken into account with the simplified approach of the energy loss calculation using U values and areas The calculation
52. by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows 4 4 3 1 General Properties Description The General Properties dialog window is displayed in all object properties dialog windows All objects in a flixO Pro document have a General Properties dialog window It contains information about the object s general properties Domain Object Properties LY lt General Domain Style Name Layer L Bounding Rectangle x 736 34 Width 4 Y 1433 57 Height 28 194 _ Cancel Fields Style In this drop down list all the styles of a construction are listed The topmost style corresponds to the currently active object you can assign any style in the list to that object by selecting a style from the list Edit If you activate this button you can edit the style that is at the top of the drop down list Name Here you can name the object individually This name should be different than the names of other objects of the same type Layer This field indicates the layer which contains the object X This is the x coordinate of the upper left corner of the object respectively of the bounding rectangle of the object indicated in the selected unit Y This is the y coordinate of the upper left corner of the object respectively of the bounding rectangle of the object indicated in the selected unit Width This is the width of the object indicated in the selected unit Height This is the h
53. choose Cancel from the context menu or you can hit ESC Keyboard For keyboard input make sure that the properties toolbar is visible If the toolbar is not visible you can activate it with the command Toolbox in the menu View Activate the toolbar by hitting the Tab key or by clicking on one of its fields You can activate the individual fields by repeatedly hitting the Tab key or by hitting the Tab key while the Shift key is held down Enter the x and y coordinates of the start point into the appropriate fields and then enter the coordinates of the endpoint or the direction and length of the line The coordinates can either be defined as cartesian or polar coordinates To end the entry click on the Create button Defining Styles The presentation of a line can be defined in the Style list in the Line tool properties The list shows all styles for lines that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new line will always be created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list see figure 1 You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles flyout or in the Style drop down list in the Line tool properties The line styles can be also be adjusted afterwards by using Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 138 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools Position x1 166 624 mm yl 78 232 mm x2 565 404 mm Y2 3
54. color of the minimum value Same color for each Determines whether values temperature or heat flux density within a certain area should have the same color or not in which case a color gradient of the values is generated If this option is selected you can also define the size of the domain area 4 4 2 17 Grid and Guidelines Description In the grid and guidelines dialog window the parameters of the grid guidelines and snap functions are determined Most of these settings can also be adjusted on the Snap toolbar A settings always affect the current page cf tabs on the lower edge ofthe application window a 2 LY 2 H Application B Document A eee Grid Cavities Horizontal place a grid dot every 2 Calculation z ae 5 000 Results Vertical place a grid dot every Millimeter Current Page 1 y Grier Gini v Show grid Show grid as lines Horizontal Guidelines E Snap to grid Show grid as dots Vertical Guidelines Guidelines V Show guidelines v Snap to guidelines Y Snap to object Fields Horizontal Vertical place Defines the horizontal and vertical distance between grid grid dot every points Show gird guidelines Hides or unhides the grid guidelines On the Snap toolbar these options are represented by the icons HE and a 234 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows The same settings are also locate
55. defined in the Style list of the Rectangle tool properties see figure 1 The list shows all styles for rectangle objects that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new rectangle object will always be created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles Flyout or in the Style drop down list in the Rectangle tool properties The styles can be also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see Tutorial 1 Reference Paint hor Left y ver Top 2 Position and Dimension 10 000 mm 20 000 mm W 30 000 mm h 40 Create Properties Style Red black bordered Extended Figure 1 4 1 27 Ellipse Tool Use Description The Ellipse tool lets you create ellipses and circles on report pages 141 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Reference 4 1 28 142 How do activate it The Ellipse tool can be activated with the command Ellipse in the menu Insert or by clicking I on the Y icon in the Toolbox flyout When the tool is active the mouse becomes a How do use it The Ellipse tool is used like the Rectangle tool aside from the fact that instead of a rectangle the tool creates an ellipse Text Tool Use Limitations Description The Text tool lets you add comments title and expl
56. desired location and then releasing the mouse button ESC Key The escape key is used to cancel a process Exterior Edge An exterior edge is a component edge which surrounds all material domains Guidelines A guideline is a vertical or horizontal line whose position can be precisely defined Guidelines can be used to align objects Grid The grid is composed of regularly distributed points within the working area These points can be used to align objects Graphic Objects Graphical Objects are not included in the calculation They are used to illustrate the results and facilitate legibility Interior Edge An interior edge is a component edge which is completely surrounded by a material domain e g floor heating systems and chimneys Isotherm Linie in a cross section with the same temperature Mesh The mesh is a geometric subdivision of the material domain which is necessary to create the equation system needed to do the analysis It influences the precision of the numerical solution Numerical Solution The numerical solution is the result of the mesh generation and the calculation of the physical model by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Conventions Parametric Objects These are objects whose edge lengths can be edited with the Select Move Scale tool The coordinates of the corner points can be adjusted according to predefined corner rules These are objects
57. e It is not possible to create edges where one edge of a domain cuts across another edge of the same domain e There must be at least one unventilated air cavity material and one slightly ventilated air cavity material present in the document e It is only possible to assign surface emissivities if the cavity emissivities are calculated by flixo pro cf Cavity Options dialog window by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 79 Reference 4 1 12 Boundary Condition Tool Use Description The Boundary Condition tool allows you to define the boundary conditions and optionally cf Cavity Options dialog window the radiation properties of the surfaces which are needed for a complete definition of a physical problem How do activate it The Boundary Condition tool can be activated with the menu command Boundary Condition in the menu Insert or by clicking on the gt icon in the Toolbox flyout When the tool is active I the mouse cursor becomesa How do use it When you have activated the tool choose the desired boundary condition from the Boundary Condition flyout or from the Boundary Condition drop down list in the tool properties see figure 3 Set the mouse on the spot on the edge of a domain from which the boundary condition should be valid and click on the spot If the option Only vertices with change of direction is checked the boundary condition will be assigned to the nearest corne
58. edit 167 rename 167 Styles dialog window Isotherms Style 184 Overview 176 Temperature Style 179 Styles Flyout 167 Subject 270 Subtract 152 Summary Author 243 307 flixo 7 Help Summary Category 243 Comments 243 Company 243 Keywords 243 Manager 243 Subject 243 Template 243 Title 243 Surface Condensation 91 Surface Densities 91 Surface Humidity 87 Surface Temperature 91 SVG Import settings 221 Switch automatically to 1st report page after calculation 213 System equations solutions Settings 231 Termination criteria 231 System Info 247 System layers 159 Sytles dialog window Min Max Temperature Style 182 ST Tab Key 293 Temperature 87 Temperature Faktor fRSI 87 Temperature Field 156 Temperature legend style Properties 201 Temperature Style Properties 179 Temperature Tool 87 Template 143 270 Text Style Properties 209 Text Tool 142 Title 270 To Back one Step 153 To Front one Step 153 Tool Air Cavity Wizard 77 Assign Properties 66 Boundary Conditions 80 Crop 83 Dimension 135 Edit 59 62 Ellipse 141 308 Elliptical Domain 73 Equivalent U Value 105 Frame U Value 109 Heat Flux 98 Heat Flux Density 96 Information Object 136 Joint U Value 113 Line 138 Measure 135 Measure distance 69 Min Max Temperature 91 Minimum Surface Temperature 91 Move 59 Multiple use 222 Overview 58 Pipette 66 Polygon Domain 75 Polyline 139 Psi Value 121 Psi Value 2 Constructions 122 Psi
59. error according to EN ISO 10211 Display the value of any result object e g temperature object The object is identified by a name The name of the result object can be set in the Properties Flyout and must match with the one in this dialog Current page number in the document You can change the type of numbering numerical alphabetical roman set the first page and define a prefix The title of the current page cf tabs just below the work area Saved date and optionally the saved time of the document The keywords for the document The value will be taken from the document properties cf File Properties dialog window The sum of absolute values of all heat fluxes flowing into or out of the component The subject of the document The value will be taken from the document properties cf File Properties dialog window The title of the document The value will be taken from the document properties cf File Properties dialog window by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Style 4 4 5 23 Material Search Description The selections correspond to the defined text styles cf Text style category in the Styles flyout The field function will be created with the selected text style The style can be changed afterwards with Drag amp Drop In this dialog window you can define the filter criteria Filter Properties Le A Filter Name steel Category lt A
60. few wizards which help with the assigning of materials 42 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Window Frame Analysis and Wizards Before starting a calculation you can have the program search for domains containing special materials automatically have materials assigned to small domains according to user defined rules or have particular domains highlighted These settings can be determined in the Special Materials Options dialog window see figure 5 All material domains with the material Undefined Material will be sought If you are working with our example all domains with a surface area smaller than 0 1 mm2 will be combined with the largest adjacent domain If a larger domain is defined with Undefined material then a warning appears and the calculation can be interrupted Options Y X Application 3 Document Model Special Materials Cavities Calculation Name Undefined Material Results Current Page Critical Materials 4 Check for materials before calculation Small Domains Y Automatically assign materials For areas smaller than 01 mm Y with the material of the neighbor with the greatest area v Marker color E y OK Cancel Figure 5 The examination begins after the start of the calculation which can be activated with the menu command File Calculate or by clicking on the P icon on the standard toolbar Click on the arrows
61. gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 109 Reference o IV un 7 fi 0 035 W m K j nr U j j J poa f U y Figure 1 Preconditions for a Uf value calculation You have to define the frame materials which determine the frame measurements in the opening dialog window Alternatively the kind and orientation of the window can be set in the dialog window The type to determine the frame width Automatic 2 Constructions or 3 Constructions can be customized later in the Properties flyout cf figure 2 If the frame width is determined automatically based on the selected frame materials the method to calculate the frame width Max of projections Cold side projection Warm side projection as well as the frame materials themselves can be customized later in the Properties flyout cf figure 2 too 110 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools Properties Ax 1 7 4 Name Style Uf Value ee 4 U Value W m2 K 1 77144 4 Type Automatic 4 Frame length calculatio Max of projections y 4 Frame Materials Polyamid 6 6 with F Aluminium Si allo Y EPDM ethylene pr F Panel E Illen M Elastomeric foam x mm 23 000 y mm 130 807 Width mm 174 000 Height mm 98 612 Figure 2 Properties flyout for an Uf value object The calculation of a frame U value is explained in detail in tutorial 4 In special cases
62. hitting the Tab key or by hitting the Tab key while the Shift key is held down Enter the x and y coordinates of the start point into the appropriate fields and then enter the coordinates of the endpoint or the direction and length of the line The coordinates can either be defined as Cartesian or polar coordinates To end the entry click on the Create button Defining Styles The power of a heat source can be defined in the Style list in the Heat Source tool properties The list shows all available source powers that have previously been determined in the Boundary Conditions flyout A new source or sink will always be created with the power currently marked in the Style drop down list see figure 1 You can either change the selection of the power in the Boundary Conditions flyout or in the Style drop down list in the tool properties The power of the source can also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 Position x1 0 000 mm y1 10 000 mm 2 100 000 mm y2 10 000 mm Properties Input 2 Points Point Direction Coordinates O Cartesian Polar Style Suena y p Extended Figure 1 Tool properties 82 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools F Limitiations e Start and endpoint have to be inside the same material domain 4 1 14 Crop Tool Use Limitations Description Th
63. in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 4 Summary e The calculation can be activated with the command Calculate in the menu File or by clicking on the P icon on the standard toolbar After a successful calculation the program automatically skips to the first report page depending on the chosen Options e If the construction does not fulfill certain conditions a warning appears and the Zoom In calculation can be interrupted By clicking on the button in the DXF by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 43 Tutorials Import message line the next problem spot is magnified and the problem can be fixed O continue the tutorial you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top 3 4 5 Calculation of Frame U Values Aside from other results you can have the U value for a window frame automatically be defined This option is only available for constructions which according to EN ISO 1007 2 are recognized as window frame U value calculations e The thermal conductivity of the panel is 0 035 W mkK e The visible part of the panel is at least 190 mm e There are exactly two air temperatures on the boundary conditions e There are exactly 2 adiabatic boundary conditions Symmetry Model Section each one on both model sections The automatic frame U value calculation is also available for transoms and mullions not mentioned in the standard In which case both glass units need to
64. legend It also allows you to adjust the border lines as well as hide or unhide them This setting group determines the properties of the legend border lines color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Extended Tab Digits Thousands delimiter Alignment Key Color Size Padding Font Tab 4 4 1 12 Legend Style Description Number of decimal places or significant digits which are to be displayed The kind Decimal Points or Significant you can select using the adjacent drop down list The digits left of the decimal point will be grouped into thousands This setting group lets you align the legend text You can determine the alignment with the two drop down lists Name and Description Here you can determine the width size of the color keys in the legends You can observe the change in size in the preview pane This setting adjusts the padding between horizontal and vertical legend columns This style is applied when you create Temperature and Heat Flux Density fields by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 201 Reference Legends Style Oe Legends Style o ae oe biag General Extended Margins Font Decimal Points 7 E Thousands delimiter Show units Show re
65. material legend for the result object This option allows you to display a boundary condition legend for the result object This is a dialog window for Frame Uf Value objects and Joint UTJ Value objects on report pages The dialog window contains two tabs the General tab and the Uf Value respectively UTJ Value tab containing frame materials 240 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Frame U Value Properties General Frame Materials Type Automatic zj Subtype Pd Aluminium Si alloys Elastomeric foam Illen Define all true frame materials like wood aluminium etc but WITHOUT air cavities and glazing stripping materials EPDM ethylene propylene diene monomer um 4 OK Cancel Fields Type Subtype Frame Materials 4 4 3 6 Multiple Section Properties Description Here you define the type how flixo pro determines the frame width Automatic The frame width will be determined automatically based on the selected frame materials 2 Constructions The model consists of 2 components Panel and frame 3 Constructions The model consists of 3 components Panel frame and panel Here you define the orientation for the type 2 Constructions and 3 Constructions This option allows you to define the frame materials for the window frame cross section for the type Automatic The settings will
66. materials must be known Alternatively you can also set the type and the orientation of the model in the dialog window and then adapt the dimension manually by moving the position of the start points of the dimension objects using the Select Move Scale tool or the Edit tool respectively Frame Materials Y xs Type Automatic y Subtype Frame Materials Define all true frame materials like wood aluminium etc which define the frame dimensions but WITHOUT glazing stripping materials Efluminium Si alloys F Elastomeric foam EPDM ethylene propylene diene monomer Ellen E Panel E Polyamid 6 6 with 25 glassfibre DK Cancel Fields Type Here you set the type how flixo pro determines the frame width Automatic The frame width will be determined automatically based on the selected frame materials 2 Constructions The model consists of 2 components Panel and frame 252 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Subtype Material List Cancel 4 4 5 8 Adapt Size Description 3 Constructions The model consists of 3 components Panel frame and panel Here you set the orientation for the type 2 Constructions and 3 Constructions Here you have to determine all the frame materials of the frame section which define the frame dimensions The settings will be needed for the automatic calculation of frame U values
67. model pages the constructions geometry with all its physical properties is entered e Then the construction is analysed and calculated e Finally the results are evaluated and a report is complied in order to present the results as desired In every part similar basic functions will be implemented like the determination of layers materials font styles etc by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 17 Use 2 4 18 Defining the Construction You can enter the geometry of the construction either directly in flixo pro or you can import it from CAD products and complete it on the model page afterwards To enter the construction use the tools and objects on the Model page You can switch to the Model page by clicking on the corresponding tab just below the work area Model Master Report Input Temperatures With the following tools existing objects can be edited X Select Move Scale e Predit WhRotate A F e TAssign Properties Dcut W Measure Distance Zoom With the following tools new objects can be created e Rectangular Domain e Elliptical Domain e Grolygon Domain e Air Cavity EN ISO 10077 2 5 Boundary Condition Heat Source The geometry of the construction can also directly be imported from CAD products and adjusted in the model page Functions like logical operations Align object the use of guidelines and grids facilitate the data entry If the cons
68. of the frame With flixo pro this can be done in two ways e By setting a special boundary condition which automatically recognizes the corner domains and sets the appropriate boundary conditions when preparing the calculation e Manual assignment of the boundary conditions in the proper places In this tutorial we will examine the automatic version Surfaces of cavities can be treated specially so the energy transport within air cavities is reduced by radiation In flixo pro there are 2 ways to consider radiation properties for air cavities which differ from standard properties e By setting special radiation properties flixo pro calculates automatically the resulting emissivities in the main heat flux direction which are necessary for the calculation of equivalent conductivities e By explicit definition of the resulting emissivities in heat flux direction in the cavity materials In this tutorial the radiation properties will be defined with special boundary conditions Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 4 Summary e The boundary conditions are listed in the Boundary Conditions flyout In the lower part the boundary conditions contained in the database are listed whereas the upper list displays all boundary conditions present in the current document e New boundary condition objects are created with the Boundary Condition tool Only the start point of a boundary condition is defined which f
69. of the Psi value therefore depends strongly on the calculation method of the simplified approach These are defined in international and national standards Therefore the same construction can have different Psi Values depending on the national standard for the calculation of transmission losses The calculation of Frame U Values according to EN ISO 10077 2 is explained in tutorial 4 El Content Psi Value with 2 Components Psi Value with 3 Components Edge Spacer Psi Value Equivalent U Value Frame U Value cf tutorial 4 Joint U Value 3 5 1 Psi Value 2 Constructions Psi Values with 2 Components will be usefully calculated for constructions where 2 components are connected e g wall ceiling junction or where a construction is interrupted by a single component e g mullion of a curtain wall Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 5 Summary e A Psi value with 2 components is defined using the Psi Value tool 2 Components by applying 3 mouse clicks The first two points define the surface line through which the effective heat flux should be calculated The third point reference point divides the surface into 2 parts with different U values The points are captured if the snap functions are active Grid H Guidelines br and Objects mi cf menu Arrange e You can adjust the properties of the Psi value calculation in the Properties flyout O Click here or on the navigation buttons in the title in order
70. of the Source 81 Present Dimensions 135 Print 143 Print Preview 143 Problem spot 42 Program Structure 16 Program Version 270 Prompt Equivalent U Value 105 Prompt for document properties before initial save 214 Prompt Information 136 Prompt Psi Value 121 122 126 131 Prompt Uf Value 109 Prompt Usb Value 117 Prompt UTJ Value 113 Prompt U Value 100 Proof 149 Proof Mode 293 Properties 145 161 174 195 Boundary Condition legend style 199 Dimension Style 204 Document 143 equivalent U Value Style 195 Frame U Value Style 195 Heat Flux density legend style 201 Information Style 205 Line Style 207 Material legend style 199 Psi Value Style 197 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Region Style 208 Streamlines 191 Temperature legend style 201 Text Style 209 Uf Value Style 195 Usb Value Style 195 UTJ Value Style 195 U Value Style 193 Properties Flyout 174 Protect 155 Document 282 objects 279 Report 280 Protect objects 279 Protect the document 155 Protect the object 155 Protect the report 155 Protection 155 Protection against certain changes 155 Psi Value 44 45 46 121 122 126 131 Psi Value Definition 121 122 126 131 Psi Value for 2 constructions 45 Psi Value for 3 constructions 46 Psi Value Style Properties 197 Psi Value Tool 121 Psi Value Tool 2 Constructions 122 Psi Value Tool 3 Constructions 126 Psi Value Tool Edge Spacer 131 R Rectangle Tool 140
71. of the wizard is explained in detail in tutorial 4 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 229 Reference Options H Application B Document Model Special Materials Cavities Calculation Results Current Page Standard EN ISO 10077 2 Version EN ISO 10077 2 2012 me 7 Calculate emissivities F Anisotropic conductivities w Marker color Divisions 4 Automatic division EEE v 4 Ignore existing divisions Felder Version Calculate emissivities Anisotropic conductivities Automatic division 230 Selection of the standard version for the computational algorithms used for the calculation of the equivalent conductivities Emissivities long wave radiation properties in the main heat flux direction according to EN ISO 10077 2 should be calculated as average based on the set radiation surface properties by flixo pro If this option is not activated the average emissivities have to be defined in the cavity materials If this option is selekted then per cavity in both x and y direction an equivalent conductivity according to EN ISO 10077 2 will be calculated and applied Determines whether air cavities should be divided according to 10077 2 into smaller air cavities Division of air cavities can have a significant influence on the results of the calculation According to the standard only air cavities with outlets smaller
72. ones of the document settings All inconsistent data were adapted automatically By choosing gt Stop lt all cavities or glazing with automatically adapted properties will be highlighted the calculation will stop and you can assign other properties By choosing gt Continue lt the calculation will be started automatically Stop Continue Fields Stop The calculation is stopped and all cavities whose properties don t match with the options will be highlighted By repeatedly clicking on the Zoom In button in the message line all critical material domains will be highlighted in order to assign other materials respectively radiation properties to these domains These highlights will disappear in the next calculation Continue The calculation continues with the current subdivisions Calculation Automatic Cavity Subdivision You have selected the option automatic subdivision of domains according to EN ISO 10077 2 in the Option dialog window Not all of the domains could get subdivided by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 289 Reference 4 5 4 5 1 290 Air Cavities LY es Not all domains with EN 150 10077 2 air cavities could be automatically subdivided By choosing gt Stop lt all critical places will be marked and the calculation will stop You can divide the domains at the marked places manually By choosing gt Continue lt the calculation will p
73. or by clicking on the HHF icon in the Toolbox flyout Then select Equivalent U Value as kind in the tool properties cf figure 1 When the tool is active the mouse becomesa How do I use it To calculate the equivalent U value over a surface edge three steps are required With the first two clicks at points A and B in the example at hand you set the cross section line thus defining the surface edge over which the equivalent U value is to be calculated After you have moved the mouse outside of the construction area and a dashed preview appears define with a third click the position of the measurement lines If the SHIFT key is pressed while you define the surface line then the first click sets start and endpoints automatically at the adjacent adiabatic edges e g construction sections The first click should be set near the boundary where the bordering surface line should begin With the second click you define the parallel cross section and confine the bordering surface line Defining Styles The presentation of an equivalent U value object can be defined in the Style list in the Equivalent U Value tool properties see figure 1 The list shows all styles for equivalent U value objects that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new equivalent U value object will always be created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles f
74. per square meter kelvin Joule per kilogramm kelvin Watt per meter kelvin wn 4 ji 4 fi 4 fi 4 ii 4 jp jp jp jie Milligramm per meter hour pascal 4 4 2 6 DXF Import Description These setting are used for importing CAD files with DXF files The importing of DXF files is described in detail in tutorial 3 Arc settings must be determined before the DXF file is opened 218 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Options Y eS B Application General User Interface Conversion Save 1 Unit corresponds 1 Millimeter v Database T emplates Basic Units Transform all points to grid points Derived units Grid width 0 02 Millimeter 3 Data Exchange A DXF Import Reference circle radius 1 000 Millimeter LT J Import Export No of edges for polygon approximation of ref circle 10 Tools Document Minimum number of edges for an arc 2 Model Use layout data Special Materials Cavities v Don t import hidden layers Calculation Assign material default value Selected material v Results Current Page Unused Edges 4 Use only shady drawn edges Color IN Cancel Fields 1 Unit corresponds Transform all points to grid points Grid width Reference circle radius No of points for the polygon approximation of ref circle by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch In DXF files geome
75. start point is to the right of the endpoint all objects will be marked that are only partly contained within the rectangle If you would like to mark all the objects which are present on a report page you can do this with the menu command Edit Select All out of the menu or with the keyboard combination Ctrl A To move objects you must first mark them Now you can click on one of the selected objects and move it to a desired position with the mouse the mouse button must be kept down while moving it With the Shift and Ctrl keys you can influence the behavior of the object while you move it If you hold down Ctrl while moving the object then a copy of the object will be moved the original object will remain untouched If you hold down the Shift key then the object can only be moved vertically and horizontally It is also possible to combine both options at once Objects or copied objects will snap to a reference point when they are being moved if the snap option is set The position of the reference point corresponds to that of the corner point which is closest to the mouse click If you want the upper left corner to be the snap reference for that object then you must click near the upper left corner of the object The reference point is marked with a little circle when the object is being moved and after moving it it becomes a filled circle amp To scale an object you must also select it first Unlike moving an object you must c
76. surface line through which the effective heat flux should be calculated The third point defines the position of the dimension line The points are captured if the snap functions are active Grid 2 Guidelines E and Objects td cf menu Arrange e You can adjust the properties of the U value calculaion in the Properties flyout O Click here or on the navigation buttons in the title in order to continue with the tutorial 3 5 5 Joint U Value Joint U Values according to EN 13947 are calculated for mullion and transom constructions In contrast to the frame U value according to EN ISO 10077 2 the joint U value already contains the thermal influence of the spacer or edge Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 5 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 47 Tutorials Summary e The calculation of the Joint Uf Value for the selected result object is performed either chosing the menu command Results U Value gt Joint Uf Value or selecting the corresponding result object context menu command or using the U Value tool kind Frame U Value All frame materials without frame sealing has to been marked in the opening Frame Material dialog window e The frame materials and other properties which influence the calculation can be adjusted in the Properties flyout Click here or on the navigation buttons in the title in order to continue with the tutorial 3 6 Document Templates T
77. than 2mm are allowed to be subdivided into smaller air cavities by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Ignore existing colors Marker color 4 4 2 15 Calculation Description Determines whether manually defined visible boundaries of air cavities to other air cavities with the same properties should be ignored or taken into account in the division calculation Division of air cavities can have a significant influence on the results of the calculation According to the standard only air cavities with outlets smaller than 2mm are allowed to be subdivided into smaller air cavities Color with which additional division points should be highlighted In the calculation dialog window the parameters for the calculation process can be determined The correct parameter settings are important to obtain accurate and sensible results The calculation process is comprised of four parts Generation of the element grid System equation solutions Automatic Mesh Refinement Calculation of temperature dependent conductivity values Options Y X H Application B Document Model 4 Considering EN ISO 10211 Requirements Special Materials Mesh Cavities a Min element angle 20 000 Results Max element size 1 50 Current Page A Mesh Refinement Y Activate Max No iterations 4 Solver Method Relative Error AND Heatflux Error X Max rel eror 1 0
78. the surface humidity as well as the critical room humidity The start and endpoint of the surface line segment will be labeled as well If you would like to interrupt the input process before defining the endpoint then use the context menu command right click Cancel or hit the ESC key With the Select Move Scale tool or Edit tool respectively you can change the position of the label along with the start and endpoints The style of the label e g the number of post decimal place holders display of maximum temperatures display of average temperatures the optional display of condensation zones humidity as well as the graphical properties of the label lines can all be changed through the corresponding Style in the Styles flyout You can adjust the critical surface humidity and the humidity of the neighboring rooms which influences the optional results in the Properties flyout cf figure 1 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools Name Style Extremal Temper 4 Temperature min C 17 40637 Temperature max C 18 9275 Temperature avg C 18 32847 fRSi 0 914 Surface humidity 59 Room humidity for con 85 Room humidity for criti 68 True length mm 2000 000 4 Room humidity 9 50 Surface threshold humic 80 4 fRSi Custom E 4 x mm 109 853 y mm 120 000 Width mm 26 893 Height mm 140 000 Figure 1 Properties flyout of a Min Max Tempera
79. the Components flyout Documents Shows the Documents flyout ly Properties Shows the Properties flyout by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 149 Reference Start Page Shows the page that appears by default when you start The default behavior can be customized in the options 2 Context Help Shows the Context Help flyout Toolbars Submenu to show or hide the toolbars Message Bar In case of problems during a calculation or a DXF conversion a message bar is shown automatically above the document window Shows or hides the message bar Status Bar Shows or hides the status bar 3 Rulers Shows or hides the rulers H Guidelines Shows or hides the guidelines d Grid Shows or hides the grid 4 2 3 1 View Menu Submenu Zoom 2 Zoom Undo Undoes the last zoom or scroll action 5 Zoom Redo Repeats the last undone zoom or scroll action Q Zoom Out Reduces the object on the screen a Zoom In Magnifies the object on the screen A Zoom to Selection Magnifies the selected objects to fill the work area a Zoom to All Magnifies all objects to fill the work area Objects a Zoom to Material Searches for a domain with a specific material and then magnifies to it to fill the work area The use of this function is also discussed in Tutorial 4 2 Zoom to Conflict Displays problem areas while importing DXF files and during the calculation The use of this function is explained in T
80. the Rectangular Domain tool A The corner points are captured if the snap functions Grid i Guidelines Bl and the point of the circumscribing rectangle Object Id see menu Arrange are activated e The origin of the coordinate system can be adjusted by clicking on the icon in the upper left hand corner of both rulers and by moving the mouse in direction of the new origin and then releasing O continue tutorial 1 you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top Defining Materials Next we are going to assign materials to the individual domains of the construction The materials of the ceiling cavity wall junction are listed in the table below for simplification purposes only one type of sound insulation will be used Material Category Subcategory Lime sand EN ISO 10456 Plasters and renders Brick Insulation Gypsum sand EN ISO 10456 Plasters and renders Floor coverings underlay wool EN ISO 10456 Floor coverings Cement sand EN ISO 10456 Plasters and renders Reinforced concrete with 1 EN ISO 10456 Concrete steel by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Basic Techniques O the subsequent film materials from other standards have been partly used Also the colors of the materials used can differ from those in your version of the program Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 1 Summary e The materials are arranged in the
81. the lines cannot be shown when their by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows End Point Markers Extended Tab Show dimension Show property Show minimum temperature Show maximum temperature Show average temperature Font Tab 4 4 1 15 Line Style Description thickness exceeds 0 394 mm Here you can determine how the ends of a label line should look like There are two drop down lists that show the different possibilities If this option is activated then the surface of the domain or the length of the edge will be displayed as well If this option is activated then the properties of the domain e g Lambda value or the edges e g boundary condition attributes will be displayed as well If this option is activated then the minimum temperature of the domain or of its edges will be displayed as well If this option is activated then the maximum temperature of the domain or of its edges will be displayed as well If this option is activated then the average temperature of the domain or of its edge will be shown as well This style is applied when you are working with the Line or Polyline tool The style determines line properties such as color style thickness and type Line Style Le je Name Fill Y A Line Weight 0 200 2 Millimeter y iaz A v by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 207 Reference
82. the reference lengths of the base constructions using the Scale Move Select tool or Edit tool respectively by moving the start end and reference point You can also change the text positions of the help objects of the U Values of the base construction and the dimension lines using the same tool The base values of the Y value calculation which have a significant influence on the result U values of the constructions length of the components if the heat flux through the sections at the start and endpoint should be considered and the temperature difference can be adjusted afterwards in the Properties flyout cf figure 1 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 127 Reference Properties v Ax e 4 Name Style Psi Wert Erweil w s Psi Value Wir 0 12225 a Consider heat fl 4 Show alert 7 Lirmit 5 Temperature dil Maximum e Reference Point Second 4 Basis 1 Automatic U Value W 1 03093 Dimension r 237 000 4 Basis 2 U Value Custom y U Value W 1 43527 g Dimension r 37 000 A 4 Basis 3 Automatic U Value WY 0 23023 Dimension r 1600 000 4 x mm 23 000 y mrn 158 273 Width mm 207 956 Height mm 65 767 Figure 1 Properties flyout for a Y value object with 3 basis constructions Defining Styles The presentation of a Psi value object can be defined in the Style list in the Psi Value tool properties see figure 2 The
83. the same tool The base values of the Y value calculation which have a significant influence on the result U values of the constructions length of the components if the heat flux through the sections at the start and endpoint should be considered and the temperature difference can be adjusted afterwards in the Properties flyout cf figure 1 Selected Object Name Style Psi Value extendec Results Psi Value W m K 0 1855 Calculation Consider heat flux tl F Show alert 7 Limit 5 Temperature differe Maximum v Basis 1 Automatic v U Value W m K 0 700 Dimension mm 216 000 Basis 2 Automatic X U Value W m K 0 23833 Dimension mm 525 000 Dimension Reference Point x mm 23 000 y mm 134 149 Width mm 174 000 Height mm 89 Figure 1 Properties flyout of a Y value object based on 2 constructions Defining Styles The presentation of a Psi value object can be defined in the Style list in the Psi Value tool properties see figure 2 The list shows all styles for Psi value objects that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new Psi value object will always be created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles flyout or in the Style drop down list in the Psi Value tool properties The styles can also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by
84. there are only two boundary condition temperatures Temperature difference TA TB of the boundary condition temperatures TA and TB at the points A and B K AT if there are more than 2 boundary condition temperatures then the temperature difference will be calculated according to the rule defined in the Properties flyout U U value for the construction from A to E W m2K U U value for the construction from F to C W m2K U U value for the construction from F to E W m2K length of the projection of the line segment AE on the perpendicular to the section line AB m length of the projection of the line segment FC on the perpendicular to the section line CD m length of the projection of the line segment FE m Comments e In general the Y values are dependent on the side of a construction interior or exterior for which the value is being calculated In particular the relational lines IA E and IC E can be different e If the heat flux exceeds a critical relatively high value then the corresponding warning will be shown You can adjust this value in the Properties flyout e All heat fluxes will be calculated counterclockwise from start to end point 130 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools e To calculate the heat flux all reference points will automatically be shown at the nearest mesh point on the surface e The sign of the heat flux is taken into a
85. this is the case this parameter is used instead In this list you can define the standard characteristics when converting imported DXF data Level The material which is defined in the layer material mapping table is assigned automatically to all objects lying on the DXF layer Layer only closed objects The material which is defined in the layer material mapping table is assigned automatically to all closed objects e g polylines lying on the DXF layer Selected material The selected material from the Material list is assigned to all objects You can also change the kind of material assignment by clicking on the Options button in the message line after importing the DXF file The automatic material assignment is explained in tutorial 3 Determines whether layout data information should be included in the conversion If this option is not active only the model data will be used Otherwise are imported but not displayed You can change the visibility If this option is selected the hidden layers in the DXF file are not imported Otherwise they are imported but not displayed You can change the visibility of the layers in the Layers flyout This option determines whether the entire line segment or just the end points of unclosed lines should be highlighted or not by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Special Color 4 4 2 7 SVG Import Export Description D
86. those of the template Click on the button to open the dialog window see Figure 2 In the dialog you can select the materials which will be replaced by the existing materials from the template The new material from the template can be selected from a list by clicking into the last column If you choose this option all boundary conditions selected in a dialog window of the document are replaced by those of the template by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Model Special Materials Cavities Calculation Results Cancel 4 4 5 13 Opening Pictures Description Click on the button to open a dialog window see Figure 2 In the dialog you can select the boundary conditions which will be replaced by the existing boundary conditions from the template The new boundary condition from the template can be selected from a list by clicking into the last column If you choose this option the Model Options of the template will be applied If you choose this option the Special Materials Options of the template will be applied If you choose this option the Cavities Options of the template will be applied If you choose this option the Calculation Options of the template will be applied If you choose this option the Results Options of the template will be applied Cancels the action This dialog window is opened with menu command Picture from the Inser
87. toolbar T ah HH Gh h Gay ak Sk OS lle a m Figure 3 Arrange toolbar 4 5 3 Subtraction of Objects Description The Subtraction operation allows you to subtract a domain from one or more domains The domain which is selected last will be subtracted from the other domains When only two domains are selected then the resulting object is created from the left over area of the first selected domain When more than two domains are involved then the marked domain will be subtracted from all other selected domains The resulting objects all take on the same material properties of the first selected object Figure 1 Before Figure 2 After the subtraction of the two objects Process e Activate the Select Move Scale tool and mark all the material domains from which you want to subtract e Hold down the Shift key and select the domain you want to subtract from the others e Use the command Subtract from the Arrange menu or click on the G icon located on the Arrange toolbar 3 4344 Ts GG Ge ak Sk 3 dj le lt Figure 3 Arrange toolbar 292 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Conventions 4 6 4 6 1 Conventions Symbols In some chapters certain properties are represented by symbols Please note that the import page is only shown when a DXF file is being imported These symbols or states have the following meaning Model Master Report Input Temperatures Co
88. tutorial you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top 3 4 2 Assigning Materials and Cavity Wizard Assigning materials is done like in tutorial 1 and tutorial 2 with the Drag amp Drop function For the analysis of the window frame we will select materials from the EN ISO 10077 2 Standard category In this cross section of the window frame all air cavities are assigned the material Unventilated Air Cavities According to EN ISO 10077 2 all air cavities are considered unventilated They are either completely enclosed by a material or have a connection to the exterior which is no more than 2 mm large The program will automatically and iteratively calculate the equivalent thermal conductivity of the individual air chambers Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 4 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 39 Tutorials Summary e The materials are listed in the Materials flyout a In the lower part the materials from the database are listed in the upper part materials present in the document are listed e New materials can either be added to the upper materials list or to the materials database see Materials flyout toolbar 9 e Materials can either be assigned with the Drag amp Drop function or with the Assign Properties tool a e The Assign Properties tool Y always assigns the selected material from the upper list by clicking on the desired element With the D
89. us a a a aa eaaa 143 AAA AAA TATT TTT TETA T TEET TETT 143 File Menu Submenu Calculate 22244440000044nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnn 145 SEI 1 0 1 111 once sack seek ch cues vei dada sua decana TETE ceasebandeeesusucesk sbescressusi cvszeh et deeactesdeed E O cravasen ivuasnctdestobds 145 Edit Menu Submenu Select srir ena EnA A NE A EDEN TE A R dic 147 Edit Menu Submenu Adjust rrena A ie A ek 147 Edit Menu Submenu Parametric Object onocccccccconccacaccncconanaaancncnncnnnannn cnn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn cnn nc rrnnnnnnncnnn 147 Edit Menu Submenu Layer Object naiinis i a aa ae aa a a i ias 148 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Table of Contents Edit Menu Submenu 3D equivalent Object oooooccconicocococicocinaaancncncconnnnnnnnncnnnanon nc cnn nnnnnnn nn cnn rrnnnnancnnnn 149 Edit Menu Submenu Graphic Object ooooonoocccccccccccocccccccncanananaconancnananononannnnnann cnc cnn nncnnn nn nn ca nn ranma nnccnn 149 MM EEE ET ETTITA TTT 149 View Menu Submen ZOOM rras eee AA EA ee add 150 A A A ANO 150 Arrange AA NODO 152 Arrange Menu submenu Oi dad dd aes 153 Arrange Menu Submenu AligN ooocococononccccccncnocananccccnnnnanononnconnnnnonnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnncnnacnnnns 153 Arrange Menu Submenu Same Dimension 4usssssnsnnnnnnsnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn n
90. various warning dialogs e Importing Database Entries Existing Entries e Importing Database Entries Invalid Entries Calculation Critical Material present Calculation Radiation Properties Calculation Automatic Cavity Subdivision Importing Database Entries Existing Entries A material with the same name already exists in the materials database Import Ea A An entry with the name Asphalt already exists in the database Would you like to change the name of this entry change all entries with non unique names automatically skip this entry skip all entries with non unique names or cancel the import Change Skip skipan Cancel Fields Change Opens a dialog window in which a new name can be defined by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 287 Reference Change All All names in conflict are automatically changed All names are now unique Skip Skips this entry without importing the data Skip All Skips over all materials with names matching the database without further warning Cancel Cancels the import process Importing Database Entries Invalid Entries The definition of the listed material is either incomplete or invalid Import Le as A The entry with the name Concrete does not have legal values The conditions for legal values are defined in the online help Do you want to skip this entry skip all entries with illegal values or canc
91. will be grouped into thousands The appropriate units will be shown after each by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Show result symbols Style Line End Point Markers Extended Tab Temperature fRSi Value Surface humidity Room humidity for condensation Room humidity for moisture Font Tab by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch numerical value The units can be adjusted in the Units tab of the Options dialog window The appropriate symbol dependent on the type of value will be shown before each numerical value Here you determine whether the label line should be a simple or an orthogonal right angle bent line This setting group determines the characteristics of label lines color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm Here you can determine how the ends of both label lines should look like There are two drop down lists that show the different possibilities If this option is activated the temperature of the reference point is displayed At least one option of the group Shown Properties has to be selected For points within the construction the temperature is always displayed If this option is activated the fRSi factor for surface points is shown additionally At least one option of the group Shown Properties has to be selected If this op
92. 04 z rich www infomind ch Flyout Style Resultat Objekt w Model Modell X 4 4 Isotherms Y Style Isothermen Cl Temperature Field Stream Lines Heat Flux Density Field Boundary conditions Materials Radiation properties Mesh Room temperatures Graphic Objects v Material borders y Labels y Material Legend BC Legend 4 D x mm 25 000 y mm 120 000 Width mm 170 000 Height mm 140 000 Figure 1 Properties flyout The use of the Materials Boundary Conditions Document and Components flyouts are described in individual flyout chapters You can adjust most of the properties of the displayed entries directly in the flyout or in the corresponding property dialog windows Click on the B3licon in the toolbar of the Properties flyout to activate the property dialog window 4 3 9 Context Help Flyout Description The Context Help flyout displays the explanation of the active tool Context Help Select Move Scale Select Click on an object or draw rubber band rectangle SHIFT Extends the existing selection ALT The start point of the rubber band rectangle can be Ly inside a domain Move Dragging with pressed mouse button SHIFT Moves only vertically or horizontally CTRL Moves a copy Scaling Move one of the highlighted points white handles with pressed mouse button to scale up or down the
93. 3 res for zooming ine Lambda Dif mg 0 00001 _ Moves a copy Pr IT A 000 000 Scaling reg Tee en ne ee C J kg K 1000 000 Pe SHIFT as A A D Soo corina io 4 LA 10 SO il 2 2 Program Structure flixo pro is structured into two different components Models and Reports Models In the model part the physical construction is defined Material domains and boundary conditions are the most important objects you will be working within this input component Constructions are generally made from different material domains and boundary conditions possessing different physical characteristics You can insert several models into one file or delete existing model pages see context menu 16 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Program Structure of the tabs Material domains can be created changed and moved They can even overlap Essential for the future analysis of these domains is the visibility of such domains a domain that is covered by another domain will not be included in the calculation 20 2 y 4 gt DI Model Master Report fi Input fi Temperatures Miscellaneous Fd 4 Reports The report component lets you perform various thermal queries on the model and allows you to create a report based on those results i 4 pi Model Master Report Input Temperatures Miscellaneous 2 3 Workflow Typicalflixo pro work flow is divided into the following parts e Inthe
94. 6 Air Cavity Wizard 77 Alert overwitting old file 248 Align Bottom 153 297 flixo 7 Help Align Left 153 Right 153 Top 153 Align Objects 153 Alternate tool 222 quivalenter U Wert Definition 112 116 119 Armoring iron 276 Arrange windows in tab groups 157 Assign Materials 66 Assign Properties 66 Author 270 Auto Hide All 157 Automatic backup 214 Automatic division 228 Automatic division of cavities 229 Automatic Mesh Refinement 231 Automatic recalculation 213 Automatic removal of all invisible results 211 Automatic save after calculation 214 Automatic save before calculation 214 Automatically assign 228 Automatically assign materials to small domains 228 Backup Database 215 Template 215 Batch Calculations 145 155 Boundary Condition Definition 80 Entry 80 Exterior Boundaries 80 Interior Boundaries 80 Radition properties 80 Rotational Direction Rules 80 Boundary Condition legend style Properties 199 Boundary Condition Temperatures 251 Boundary Conditions 25 264 Copy 164 Create 164 define 29 Delete 164 Duplicate 164 Edit 164 Order 29 Orientation 29 298 Properties 164 Rename 164 Boundary Conditions database dialog window 264 Boundary Conditions Flyout 164 Break after automatic material assignment 213 Break after mesh generation 213 Break after the calculation 213 Bring to Front 153 SCs Calculate 143 145 155 All models 145 All undefined models 145 Selected mode
95. 7 Select Parametric Objects 147 Select Profile 211 Select Results 147 Select Text 147 Selection tool 222 Send 143 Send File 143 Send to Back 153 Settings 20 Shift Key 293 Show Boundary Condition Legend 155 239 Boundary Conditions 239 Boundary Conditions Flyout 149 Components Flyout 149 False Coloring 155 Graphic Objects 239 Grid 149 Guidelines 149 Heat Density Field 239 Help Flyout 149 Isotherms 155 239 Labels 239 Layers Flyout 149 Material Borders 239 Material Flyout 149 MaterialLegend 155 239 Materials 239 Properties Flyout 149 Room Tempreatures 239 Rulers 149 Status Bar 149 Stream Density Field 155 Stream Lines 155 239 Styles Flyout 149 Temperature Field 155 239 Toolbars 149 Toolbox Flyout 149 Uf Value 155 Show Boundary Condition Legend 155 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Index Show Boundary Conditions Flyout 149 Show boundary conditions preview 213 Show Components Flyout 149 Show description of empty field functions 213 Show grid 149 234 Show grid as lines dots 234 Show guidelines 149 234 Show Help Flyout 149 Show Isotherms 155 Show Layers Flyout 149 Show Material Legend 155 Show Materials Flyout 149 Show Properties Flyout 149 Show resistance instead of h value 213 Show results 19 Show Rulers 149 Show start page after program launch 211 Show Status Bar 149 Show Stream Lines 155 Show Styles Flyout 149 Show Toolbars 149 Show Toolbox Flyout 149 Sink
96. 74 mm 443 230 mm Properties Figure 3 Edit tool properties O e Itis not possible to delete a corner point when there are only 3 corner points in the domain e The Edit tool can be selected only if it is not merged with the Select Move Scale tool cf Options dialog Tools General 4 1 3 Rotate Tool Use Description The Rotate tool allows you to rotate objects How do activate it The Rotate tool can be activated with the command Rotate from the menu Tools or by clicking on the amp icon in the Toolbox flyout When this tool is active the mouse turns into a round arrow How do I use it Click on the object to be rotated ifthe object is not yet selected The corners of the object will be shown as white dots There is a further black dot in the center the center of rotation see figure 1 Mouse When you move the mouse over a white dot it will take on the following form Er When you click the mouse button you can move the point and thus rotate the object until you release the mouse button again 64 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools You can also move the center of rotation before rotating the object You can do this by clicking and then holding the mouse button down and moving the center point Is the Shift key is held down while rotating an object then the rotation angle will be limited to a multiple of a given element angle First release the mouse butt
97. 8 100 mm Properties Input o 2 Points D Point Direction Coordinates O Cartesian Polar Style Black 0 2 y Extended Figure 1 4 1 25 Polyline Tool Use Description The Polyline tool lets you create open or closed shapes to structure a report How do activate it The Polyline tool can be activated with the command Polyline in the menu Insert or by clicking on the C icon in the Toolbox flyout When the tool is active the mouse becomes a I How do use it The use of the Polyline tool is related to that of the Polygon Domain tool You can create a polyline by clicking on spots where the corners of the shape should be The individual corners of the polyline can also be entered with coordinates in the Polyline tool properties see figure 1 Differences between the Polyline tool and the Polygon Domain tool e The Polyline tool does not create material domains but is rather used to structure reports The style of the lines can be adjusted in the Styles flyout e A polyline can either be closed or unclosed Use the right click command Finish from the context menu to leave the polyline unclosed you can also click on the Create button in the by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 139 Reference Polyline tool properties or select Close from the context menu to close the line Defining Styles The presentation of a polyline object can be defined in the Style list in
98. 8 5281 Dimension Reference Point x mm 64 903 y mm 195 876 Width mm 20 147 Height mm 18 805 Figure 2 Properties Flyout of heat flux density object Defining Styles The presentation of a heat flux density object can be defined in the Style list in the Heat Flux Density tool properties see figure 3 The list shows all styles for heat flux density objects that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new heat flux density object will always be created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles flyout or in the Style drop down list in the Heat Flux Density tool properties The styles can be also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 Properties Style Vector Figure 2 Heat Flux Density tool properties OD citations e This tool can only be used on the report page and only if result objects of a previously calculated model are present by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 97 Reference 4 1 19 Heat Flux Tool Use Limitations Description The Heat Flux tool allows you to calculate and display the heat flux that flows through a particular surface line How do activate it The Heat Flux tool can be activated with the command Heat Flux in the menu Results or by clicking on the I ic
99. 81 Size Adapt 26 Snap 223 Snap to grid 25 152 234 Snap to Guidelines 152 Snap to object 25 223 234 Snap to Objects 152 Snap to 293 Source 81 Spacer 46 Spacer Psi Value 46 Special Materials 42 Standard Cavity Wizard properties Fill small domains with critical material 226 Radiation surface properties 226 Slightly ventilated cavities 226 Unventilated cavities 226 Standard Material 261 Standard Result Object tool properties Show boundary conditions 224 Show Graphic Objects 224 Show labels 224 Show material borders 224 Show materials 224 Show room temperatures 224 Show surface properties 224 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Start calculation 25 Start Directories 172 Start DXF Conversion 154 Stop Calculation 268 Stream Density Field 156 Streamline period 191 Streamline properties 191 Streamline Style Properties 191 Streamlines 293 Style dialog window Boundary Condition legend style 199 Dimension 204 equivalent U Value Style 195 Heat Flux density legend style 201 Heat Flux Style 189 Information 205 Line 207 Material legend style 199 Region 208 Result Object Style 176 Streamlines 191 Temperature legend style 201 Text 209 Uf Value 195 Usb Value Style 195 UTJ Value Style 195 U Value 193 Style dialog winodw Heat Flux Density Style 188 Vektor Style 188 Style diaolg window Psi Value 197 Styledialog window Frame U Value 195 Styles create 167 delete 167 duplicate 167
100. Boundary Condition CU BC Database E Name ee fa E Select an entry from the database gt BC Database Type Temperature Heat Transfer 2 H E Special Climate E ENISO 6946 e 10 000 C Sy ENISO 10077 2 Frame B Interior h 25 000 Wwm K Pf E Interior reduced radiation convection Interior normal 2 Interior frame Description OE Exterior according to EN ISO 6947 a a Exterior fama HL sia 180 Figure 1 Boundary Conditions mE dialog window Window Frame e 20 000 Boundaries Figure 3 Window Frame Type 264 Figure 2 Boundary Conditions database dialog window Window Frame Boundary Condition Ea C Standard Boundary Condition Name Dr pe 8 20 000 h 7 69231 wim Description by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Figure 4 Window Frame boundary conditions dialog window Fields Name Here the name of the boundary condition is defined You cannot leave the field blank And the name must be unique i e it cannot be identical to the name of another boundary condition on the same page Aside from these restrictions you can choose any name After clicking on the button a dialog window appears with the database From the database you can choose an entry The boundary condition properties will be assumed Color Determines the boundary condition color which will appear in the mode
101. Domain tool properties see figure 1 Reference Point hor Left v ver Top Position and Dimension 20 000 mm 40 000 mm W 200 000 mm h 100 000 mm Properties No of Segments 10 r Figure 1 a Oion e The maximum number of reference points for the polygon approximation is 99 74 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools 4 1 10 Polygon Domain Tool Use Limitations Description The Polygon Domain tool is the most flexible tool for creating material domains It allows you to define a domain as non regular polygons with any number of corner points How do activate it The Polygon Domain tool can be activated with command Polygon Domain in the menu Insert or by clicking on the G icon in the Toolbox flyout When this tool is active the mouse I becomesa 1 How do use it For both the mouse and the keyboard domains are created by entering the corner points one at atime It is also possible to switch between mouse input and keyboard input while you are entering the domain Mouse Activate the Polygon Domain tool and click on the spot where you would like the first corner point of the domain to be Then click on spot where you would like the second corner point to be until you have created the domain in mind To finish the input process and thus to close the domain there are two possibilities e Click on the point where you began the starting point of
102. E 30 0 0001 Temperature Dependent Values Max rel changes 2 Max No iterations 4 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 231 Reference Fields Considering EN ISO 10211 Requirements Min element angle Max element size Mesh Refinement Method Max rel error Max heat flux error Max rel changes 232 If this option is selected the conditions of calculation will automatically meet the standard EN ISO 10211 The maximum heat flow error is less than 0 0001 The heat flux errors is the ratio of the sum of all signed heat fluxes and half of the sum of absolute values of the heat fluxes The model is calculated twice once with the number of elements characterized in Max element size once with the double number of elements The sum of the absolute values of all heat fluxes will be determined for both meshes If the relative difference of the two sums is greater than 1 the grid will automatically refined Minimum angle which the individual mesh elements finite elements area is allowed to have This value should not be too small physical reasons and should not be too big because otherwise mesh generation is not possible Maximum permitted size for a mesh element finite element This number is a ratio that is relevant to the size maximum measurement of the circumscribing rectangle If this option is selected the element mesh is refined au
103. K if the screw is not subdivided into several parts The subdivision of the equivalent 3 dimensional objects occurs where the object penetrates punctually another region by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 55 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Part IV by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Reference 4 4 1 58 Reference Tools General To create documents in flixO pro you work with various tools Each tool is used for a certain type of work process For example a tool can create objects another tool can rotate or move objects In this chapter you will find an overview of the functions of the tools and descriptions of their use At the beginning of each tool description you see a row of symbols which symbolize the tools An explanation of these symbols can be found on the conventions page Activation In principle you can activate every tool from the Tools Insert or Results menus or also by using the corresponding symbol in the Tools flyout Multiple Use and single Use Tools which create new objects such as e g heat flux objects could either be set up in multiple use mode or in single use mode e In the multiple use mode the present tool stays active until another tool explicitly is activated By holding the Alt key down the r Select Move Scale tool can temporarily be activated After releasing the Alt key the pr
104. Length 1000 000 Y Number 3 za Preview schematic Fields Length Number Orientation ot y Insert Delete OK Cancel Millimeter MECA Length of the layers Number of the layers Orientation of the layers Moves the selected layer upwards Moves the selected layer downwards Inserts a new layer before the selected layer Deletes the selected layer Adapts the layer object accordingly and closes the dialog window Cancels the action The changed data will be discarded by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 285 Reference 4 4 5 34 Glass Unit Object Description In this dialog window you can define a new glass unit object with a given U value or you can edit an existing one The preview is only schematic so you can easily recognize the layers and select them directly in the preview The layers will either be displayed horizontally or vertically and their length will be ignored In the orientation control group you can define the orientation of the layers by clicking on the circle representation or by numerically editing the corresponding field By clicking inside one of the small squares in the circle representation the corresponding multiple of 15 will be set In the characteristics group the type of glass unit can be chosen and the physical characteristics can be determined In the table you can choose the material property of the gl
105. Ma terials 4 10 22 daa Defining Boundary Conditions ooonmnnncccccnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn nan rc Starting the Calculation and Displaying the Results in a Report 2 Advanced TeCHiniqQues suicidio iii ea ind Using Components Rotating and Mirroring cccccccnnnnnncnnncnnnanancnnnonanananan cnn nc rana cn rra nn 32 Extending Construction 0 02 ii da Grouping Creating own Components 3 DXF Import uuusnennennsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnn Adjusting the Import Settings and opening a DXF File uuuuunsssnsnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 34 Selection of to be imported Layers Material Assignment 4222000000000000000nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 35 Deleting unused Edges and closing Boundary Lines uusssuuusssnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 35 Converting DXF Files and correcting Problem Spots occonnnnnncccccnnnnnncnncnnccnananannnn nc nn nnnnnn cnn nn crac cnn cnn 36 4 Window Frame Analysis and Wizards ccceecceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseseeeeeseeeeneeseesseeeensenaees 37 Adapting the Comstructlom xxi A 37 Assigning Materials and Cavity Wizard ooooonnccccconnnnancncnnnncnnanannnnncnnnnnnnn cnn nn cnn nana 39 Assigning Boundary Conditions and Radiation Surface Properties coonnnnncccccnnnnnnccccnnnnnananannnnnnnnnnnannnos 40 Material A NO 42 Calculation of Frame U Values oooonnnncccnnniccnninnnnnnncnncanncn n
106. Manager 270 Number of finite elements 270 Number of Pages 270 Number of Temperatures 270 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Page 270 Page Title 270 Program Version 270 Saved Date 270 Subject 270 Template 270 Title 270 User defined properties 270 Unite 152 Unventilated Cavity 261 Update Database 215 Update database 249 Update flixo Check 211 Configurate 211 Usb Value 117 Usb Value Style 195 Use of Components 168 Use resistance instead of h value 211 User defined properties 270 User Interface 16 Options 213 UTJ Value 47 113 UTJ Value Style 195 U Value 44 47 101 109 113 117 U Value Definition 100 U Value for periodiaclly thermal bridges 47 U Value Style Properties 193 U Value Tool 100 101 Vektor Style Properties 188 Ventilated Cavity 261 Ver Mirroring 152 Visibility of the layers 159 Visibilty 26 W What s new in version 4 1 14 What s new in version5 13 What s new in version 6 11 What s new in version 7 10 Window Frame U Value 252 Window Frame U Value Properties 240 309 flixo 7 Help Workflow 17 Zoom 150 Page 70 Page Height 70 Page Width 70 To all Objects 70 To Conflict 70 To Selection 70 Zoom In 70 150 All Objects 70 Conflict 70 Page 70 Page Height 70 Page Width 70 Selection 70 Zoom Out 70 150 Zoom Page 70 Zoom Page Height 70 Zoom Page Width 70 Zoom Percent 70 Zoom to all Objects 70 150 Zoom to Conflict 36 70 150
107. Materials flyout other boundary conditions from the Boundary Condition flyout or other font styles from the Styles flyout can be assigned to material domains boundary condition objects and other arrangement elements This can be done with the Assign Properties tool The Assign Properties tool encompasses two functions e The Assign function to assign properties e The Pipette function to collect properties How do activate it The tool can be activated with the command Assign Properties in the menu Tools or by ae ny z clicking on the W icon on the Toolbox flyout When the tool is active the symbol becomes a Ry and respectively a 4 How do use it When the Assign Properties tool is active you can click on the corresponding domain and that in the flyouts selected and highlighted material boundary conditions or font styles will be assigned By hitting the Alt key the Assign Properties tool becomes a pipette correspondingly the mouse changes its symbol to a Z and the information of other objects material boundary conditions or styles can be assumed as the current markings and subsequently can be assigned with the Assign Properties tool Oinin e Only materials or boundary conditions which have already been used in the document can be used with the Assign Properties tool In other words entries from the materials or boundary conditions database can t be used by the Assign Properties tool 4 1 5 Cut Tool Use Limita
108. N ISO 10077 22 The Psi Value tool allows you to calculate the Y values previously linear k value The Y value which quantifies additional energy is a correction value that is caused by linear shaped thermal bridges and is not taken into account in 1 dimensional energy calculations with U values The magnitude of the Y value depends on several values the quality of the construction the quality of the dimensions as well as the U value which calculates the loss of heat of the undisturbed component Hence it is possible that a poorly insulating flat roof protection has a better Y value than a well insulating window wall junction because in the case of the former the calculation of the Y value is done with exterior measurements through which part of the energy is already covered by thermal bridge energy losses by flat roof and wall measurements YP values can also be negative The calculation of Y values is explained in detail in tutorial 5 How do activate it The Psi Value tool can be activated with the menu command Psi Value in the menu Results or by clicking on the Y icon inthe Toolbox flyout Then select the kind 3 Constructions in I the tool properties cf figure 2 When the tool is active the mouse becomesa 1 How do use it To calculate the Psi value four points are required the first two points define the surface line through which the effective heat flux should be calculated The third and the fourth point r
109. O sia mb 2001 O DIN 4108 4 OEN 1745 baubook CIBC Database J Special MIcr ten anar z Language version Englisch v Update log Connecting to the update server Materials Reading information from the server Materials The information was successfully read Boundary conditions Reading information from the server Boundary conditions The information was successfully read Components Reading information from the server Components The information was successfully read Update Cancel Fields Database List Select the database which should be updated All databases containing not up to date data are automatically selected when you open the dialogue Language version Define the language of the database Update The selected database are updated The update can take several minutes A An Internet connection is required to update the databases A You will need write permissions on the database directory to update the database Cancel Cancels the update 250 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows 4 4 5 5 Boundary Condition Temperatures Description In the boundary condition temperatures dialog window you can view all the boundary conditions and their properties Click on a temperature to edit its value This dialog window can be activated from the context menu Boundary Conditions flyout Boundary Condition Temperatures Le i Boundary Condition Temperature C
110. OK The next step then is to prepare the report 2 6 Preparing a Report After you have defined a physical model with materials and boundary conditions and the calculation is complete you can generate a report based on the analysis You can switch to the report page by clicking on the appropriate tab just below the work area Modell Master Seite Seite 1 All reports are based on a template in which the general appearance of the reports can be determined based on standardized report pages The creation of such templates are explained in tutorial 6 There are two types of report pages 1 Master Reports 2 normal pages e On the Master pages you can insert objects that should appear on all normal pages e On the normal Report pages Report 1 Report 2 you generate specific analyses With the Result Object tool de you can create individual result objects You can display various object properties once you have selected them with the Select Move Scale tool k e Isotherms e Temperature fields e Stream Lines e Heat flux density fields Uf value if the object is a window frame according to EN ISO 10077 2 Usb value if the object is a roller shutter box according to EN ISO 10077 2 U joint value according to prEN ISO 12631 Legends of the materials and boundary conditions used in the model e Materials and boundary conditions used in the model e Graphical objects The visible view of the result object can be adjusted
111. TEEN EEE aai aeaaeai aaa aaa aaia naaa araia eae LEE 62 Rotate TOO iio A A A 64 Assign Properties Tol ds 66 Ot Kolo E A codes ves scecedue coi avacscuvedves staehtucek sides scuctine sedvacueseecedescdsuecuesedsevees 66 Measure DISTANCE sirpi oneee a a a a nen 69 ZOOM a A RA 70 Rectangular Domain Tool vivio d 72 Elliptical Domain Tool iso ee in el 73 Polygon Domain TOO viiese dia 75 Air Cavity EN ISO 1007 7 2 Tool nen nun sans 77 Boundary Condition Tooli ie ae iaa ea aa alo 80 Heat Source TOOD a aa a aa a aaa a a ias 81 Crop TOON vierie o O o aaa a 83 Result Object TON vicio A a Aa Ati 84 Temperature To a 87 Min Max Temperature Tool n22220uu0400nn00nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 91 Heat Flux Density TOOL cio dead 96 HeatiFlux TOON ii A AA AAA 98 UValue Tool fico 100 Parallel aye Zen A a a ST 101 EquivalentU Valle union A a 105 ErameU V alle tedio nas dee ao lides ode de a edo onda does E E callan 109 JointU Valle al ll ai a ai ie da 113 Roller Sh tter BoxU val e 2 arenan aaa Ir 117 Psi Value TOD miii A ci n 121 Z CONSTUCUONS an rdan o MES 122 ICONS TUCASA de 126 A NN 131 Dimension Tool iii is 135 Information TOO iii ai A A A AA EIA RE 136 Line Tool iii ii 138 Polyline T0ol 2 2a len aiii 139 Rectangle Tool voii A anne ee aa aaea aaa 140 Ellipse TOON ii ooo A E AA 141 an A O 142 2 Menu Commands
112. The position of the legend can be adjusted with the Select Move Scale tool Inserts a boundary condition legend into the active result object The graphical properties of the boundary condition legends can be set in the corresponding dialog window The position of the legend can be adjusted with either the Select Move Scale tool or with the Edit tool Activates the Temperature tool by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 155 Reference Min Max Temperature a Heat Flux Density I Heat Flux H U value Y psi Value Isotherms Temperature Field Stream Lines Stream Density Field Eh Refresh On Activates the Min Max Temperature tool Activates the Heat Flux Density tool Activates the Heat Flux tool Activates the corresponding U Value tool Activates the corresponding Psi Value tool Hides or unhides the isotherms of the selected result object The properties of the isotherms such as equidistance color and labeling can be defined in a corresponding dialog window Hides or unhides the temperature color fields false coloring of the currently selected object The properties of the temperature color fields can be changed in the corresponding Options dialog window which can be activated with the menu command Options in the Tools menu Hides or unhides stream lines of the selected result object The properties of the stream lines such as equidistance and line propertie
113. Value 3 Constructions 126 Psi Value Edge Spacer 131 Rectangle 140 Rectangle Domain 72 Result Object 84 Roller Shutter Box U Value 117 Rotate 64 Scale 59 Select 59 Selection 59 Single use 222 Temperature 87 Text 142 Uf Value 109 Usb Value 117 UTJ Value 113 U Value 100 U Value Parallel Layers 101 Zoom 70 Tool Properties 173 Toolbox Flyout 173 Tools Cut 66 Tooltip 293 Tool Tips 222 Transform all points to grid points 218 Transmission Loss 44 Transom 47 Tutorial 3 Dimensional 54 Basic Techniques 25 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Index Tutorial Document Templates 48 Edge Psi Value 46 Equivalent 54 Equivalent U Value 47 Frame U Value 37 Joint U Value 47 Parametric Objects 53 Psi Value 45 46 Psi Value Calculation 44 Spacer Psi Value 46 Uf Value 37 U Value Calculation 44 Wall Window junction 46 Window Frame Analysis and Wizards 37 Tutorials 157 Components 31 DXF Import 33 Overview 24 ur Uf Value 109 Uf Value calculation Assigning boundary conditions 40 Boundary conditions according to the norm 40 Conditions 44 engage 44 Panel instead of glass unit 37 Panel rebate 37 Panel size 37 Uf Value Calulation 37 Uf Value Properties 240 252 Uf Value Style 195 Undo 145 Undo Zoom 150 Ungroup 152 Unhide 270 Author 270 Category 270 Comments 270 Company 270 Created Date 270 Current Date 270 File Name 270 Hyperlink 270 Keywords 270
114. a new location and under a new name Saves all the active files Sends the current document to the default printer Displays the print preview screen Opens the Page Setup dialog window where the page and print settings are displayed and can be adjusted Saves the current document and starts the default email program and adds the data as an attachment Changes the document template All reports and settings by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Menu Commands Properties Exit will be replaced by those selected in the document template The document template can be selected in a dialog window The creation of document templates is explained in Tutorial 5 Opens the Properties dialog window where the document properties are displayed and can be adjusted Exits the active file 4 2 1 1 File Menu Submenu Calculate All Non Calculated Models All Models List of Model Names 4 2 2 Edit Menu 3 Undo Redo amp Cut Generates a mesh and calculates the temperature distribution of all non calculated constructions Optionally you can pause the program after the mesh has been generated see corresponding Options dialog window which can be activated with the command Options in the menu Tools The progress of the calculation will be displayed in a corresponding dialog window Generates a mesh and calculates the temperature distribution of all constructions presen
115. action the object will not be protected 4 4 5 31 Protect Report Description In this dialog window you can protect certain report properties from being revised or allow certain adjustments to reports It is possible to protect the report without a password If you 280 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows have defined a password a separate dialog window appears to enter the protection password Protect the report Y xs Password Le Sea Password for unprotecting the object Please reenter the password and take note of it Caution If you lose or forget a password it cannot be recovered It serene is advisable to keep a list of passwords and their Allow all users to Fl Assign master reports a Add and delete layers ance Move layers Edit layer properties m Wj Add and delete result objects Y Move result objects Scale resultat objects Y Edit result objects J Edit resultat object properties Y Assian a style to a result obiect 7 OK Cancel Fields Password You can enter a password or leave the field blank Allowed Protects the report page selectively against changes of certain adjustments list properties Actions which are selected in the list may be adapted by users for the corresponding report page Assign master reports Assign another master report as a new basis to the selected report Add and delete layers Create n
116. al Type Distance 276 Select the material of the 3D object in this list The equivalent material properties are calculated either by geometric mean or according to pr EN ISO 12631 depending on the diameter the distance and the adjacent materials Here you define the type of the periodically appearing 3D object Following types are supported Screw periodically appearing screws The screw head and screw pile shaft have the same material properties Rectangular cross section periodically appearing disturbances with a rectangular cross section Screw prEN ISO 12631 periodically appearing screws The equivalent lambda value is calculated according to prEN ISO 12631 A horizontal or vertical screws are supported The orientation of a screw is considered as horizontal if the horizontal dimension of the bounding rectangle of the screw is greater than the vertical one Axis distance of the periodic 3D objects by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows OK Inherits all data and closes the dialog Cancel Cancels the whole action 4 4 5 27 Importing Constructions Description In this dialog window the file path file name and file type as well as the import settings can be determined r amp Import Look in J Tutorials 005 rs Name Datetaken Tags Size Rating DP 7 hm_fenster dxf Recent Places Desktop m walter schmidli L Computer
117. als assignment and the automatic calculation of frame U value with flixo pro As in the other tutorials we will go step by step 235 00 106 00 Content Adapting the Construction Assigning Materials and Cavity Wizard Assigning Boundary Conditions Materials Assistants Calculation of Frame U Value 3 4 1 Adapting the Construction Either use your version of the construction from tutorial 3 or load the saved version WI77_EN flx from the tutorial subcategory in the flixO pro program directory 37 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tutorials Figure 1 For the calculation of the frame U value according to the European standard EN ISO 10077 2 the glass unit has to be replaced by a panel cf figure 2 with the following characteristics e The thickness of the panel should correspond to the thickness of the glass unit e The thickness of the air cavity between the panel and the frame cf b1 should at least be 5mm thick e The visible part of the panel cf bp should at least be 190 mm e According to EN ISO 10077 1 the measurements b2 and bp should correspond to the larger of the two projected widths of the frame section without taking into account the stripping between the frame and glass unit or panel cf figure 2 e The thermal conductivity of the panel should be 0 035 W mkK Z Figure 2 We will create the panel and an air cavity in the next steps Click on the a
118. am launch 211 OpeningaFile 143 Options 20 Options Dialog Window Activate 210 Basic Units 217 Calculation 231 304 Cavities 229 Cavity Wizard 226 Derived Units 217 DXF Import 218 General 211 Grid and Guidelines 234 Guidelines 235 Model 227 Object Capturing 223 Overview 210 Result Object Tool 224 Results 233 Save 214 Special Materials 228 SVG Import 221 Tools 222 User Interface 213 Order Bring to Front 153 Send to Back 153 To Back one Step 153 To Front one Step 153 Order of Objects 152 Bring to Front 153 Send to Back 153 To Back one Step 153 To Front one Step 153 Orientation 227 Orthotropic Material 261 Outputs 19 Page 270 Page Setup 143 Page Title 270 Pan function 222 Parallel Layers 101 Parametric Object adjusting 53 applying 53 Cancel 147 components 53 create 54 Define 54 147 Define parameters 54 Delete 147 Delete All Parameter 147 Delete Parameter 147 Dissolve Object 147 Edit 147 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Index Parametric Object Edit Parameter 147 Finish 147 generate 54 Modify 147 New Parameter 147 predefined 53 Parametric Objects 293 Paste 145 Periodically appearing Screw 54 Periodically thermal bridges 47 Phyisical model 25 Physical Explanation 101 105 109 113 117 121 122 126 131 Physics 101 Pipette 66 Polar Coordinates 75 Polygon Domain Tool 75 Polyline Tool 139 Position 176 change 32 Power
119. ana 44 5 Psi Value and U Value Calculations oooonnonnccccnonnnnnnnoccccncnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn nene nn nnnnnnnncnnnnns 44 Psi Value 2 Constructions uuusussnussennnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnrnnnnnnnsnnennnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnrnnnn 45 Psi Value 3 Constructions sssrini erasan emas Socia aaae naaa Eo asara A aaan Eaa annaa raaa anseia aoaeiaa Sasian adaini oaia 46 Edge PSizV alle iii a A aaa ER Er a A aLr a 46 EquivalentU Value 2 2 22 2 20 0 a A A A dd da ia ii 47 JOMNEUIValUS iii A AA A AA AA AAA AAA AAA RARA ARA AAA 47 6 Document Templates si neenon circle ida cer 48 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 3 flixo 7 Help EEan oLa n i ma a l E E A AE T E da in edemas 49 Creating a Standard Report Page noirida enrian dadana eanna ieda Ha anha duada aibei aadu Neat 50 Setting Standard P op ftie isigi gisantes iei aaea r a aaa rre 51 Saving the Document Template o ccccccnnnnnccccnnonnnnnancncnonnnnanancnn nn nana nnnr rra 51 Creating Template Based Documents 22200u4444404000000nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 52 1 Parametric ODjOCts ilatina dcir 53 Applying Parametric Objects 2 03 zie ascites A eee dtl ete ii et 53 Defining a Parameteric Object u 54 8 Screw according to EN 13947 OO 54 Teil IV Reference 58 T TOONS rr ad Ae 58 Select Mov Scale TOON viii a dc 59 Ann
120. anations to a report page Furthermore you can choose the style bold italic font etc of the text How do activate it The Text tool can be activated with the command Text in the menu Insert or by clicking on the A icon in the Toolbox flyout When this tool is active the mouse becomes al How do use it Click on the spot where the text box should be placed and enter the text see figure 1 The cursor shows the current position of the text To finish entering a text click outside the text box or choose the next command this is a text this is another text Figure 1 Defining Styles A new text object will always be created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles flyout or in the Style drop down list in the Text tool properties The text styles can also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools Properties Style Arial 12pt m a Extended Figure 2 Text tool properties Oion e Only one text style can be applied to a text object 4 2 Menu Commands In this chapter you will find a complete list of the menu commands and their explanations The menu structure in flixo pro follows the general conventions The usual commands like Undo are located in the same spots
121. and model entries can only be done on this user layer System layers cannot be deleted 4 3 2 Materials Flyout El Content Description Creation Modification Duplication and Deletion of Materials Grouping Materials into Categories Copying Materials Searching the Material Database Exporting and Importing Materials Description The Material flyout allows the manipulation of materials in an active document Materials can be added or deleted and their properties can be changed The top tree view displays the materials that are present in the active document The bottom tree view displays materials from a material databank which can be used for all documents The material database is divided into two parts the first part is read only and is maintained by infomind or third party the second part includes all user defined materials The material data maintained by infomind or third party can be updated either using the menu command Update or in the Options dialog window Database Templates The Properties flyout shows the properties of the selected material by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 161 Reference 162 Materials ax GG Y xa 2144 Y L Materials o General O Undefined Material E Unventilated air cavity Eps 0 E Slightly ventilated air cavity Ep 4 3 Additional 4 Im p LY Material Database a ENISO 12524 E Ey ENISO 10077 2 Frame Cavities H Frame 3 Glass E
122. anges the settings of a special isotherm The temperature is taken from the edit field and the style from the settings described above is applied Deletes the special isotherm selected in the edit field Deletes the isotherm selected in the edit field This style is used when working with the Heat Flux Density tool Vector Properties Style rw General Font Name Numbers Digits Decimal Points v V Show units Weight 9 200 Type End Point Markers Begin Preview 4 Thousands delimiter 7 Show result symbols Indicator Line End gt v q 293 2 Wim Cancel 188 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Fields General Tab Name Digits Thousands delimiter Show units Show result symbols Style Line End Point Markers Font Tab 4 4 1 6 Heat Flux Style Description Here you define the name of the style You cannot leave this field empty the chosen name must be unique i e not identical to another existing name Aside from these limitations you are free to choose any name Number of decimal places or significant digits which are to be displayed The kind Decimal Points or Significant you can select using the adjacent drop down list The digits left of the decimal point will be grouped into thousands The appropriate units will be shown after each numerical value The units can be
123. arks all the corners of the current domain If you adjust the length of the currently selected parametric object the entire object is adjusted Marks all unmarked corners and removes the marks from marked corners of the current domain Marked corners will be adjusted when the length is modified unmarked corners will stay in place Removes all markers of all the corners of the current object When the object is adjusted it simply holds its position Checks all the corners of all domains If you adjust the length of the currently edited parametric edge all edges will be adjusted Marks all unselected corners and removes the marks of the selected corners of all domains Selected corners will be adjusted if the length of the parametric object is modified unmarked edges will stay in their position Removes the marks in all corners of all domains When the object is adjusted then all objects retain their position 4 2 2 4 Edit Menu Submenu Layer Object 148 Edit Edits layered parametric objects In the opened dialog window you can modify the number of layers the layer s thickness the orientation and the materials Transform Transforms a layered parametric object into a normal parametric object After this action it is no longer possible to edit the layer properties in a special dialog window Dissolve Dissolves an existing layered parametric object and deletes all the Object parametric information by infomind gmbh web
124. ass from the list of materials existing in the document or create a new glass material in the opening Material dialog window and you can adapt the layer thickness You can also adjust the name and the color of the gas The thickness as well the material properties of the glass units can also be changed in the usual way Select Move Scale tool Drag amp Drop Glass Unit Object 47 X Glas Unit Orientation Length 250 000 Millimeter v AE u Properties E Type 9 21V 31 rn S o o U W mK a hi 7692 W mK he 250 Wmk 90 E deg No Name A Thickness mm 1 Soda lime glass gt 4 000 2 Gasfilling 1 12 000 3 Soda lime glass 4 000 Preview schematic terest 286 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Fields Length Length respectively width of the glazing Orientation Orientation of the layers Type The type of the glass unit either double 2IV or triple glazings 31V U U value of the glass unit hi resp Ri Interior heat transfer coefficient respective resistance depending on the settings in the Option dialog window he resp Re Exterior heat transfer coefficient respective resistance depending on the settings in the Option dialog window OK Adapts the glass unit accordingly and closes the dialog window Cancel Cancels the action The changed data will be discarded 4 4 5 35 Various Warnings In this chapter we shall discuss
125. asurements have to be determined in the opening dialog window Consider that these materials should only be used exclusively in the frame If necessary you have to create duplicates of materials e g aluminium frame and aluminium panel and you have to assign them to the according domains on the model page by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 113 Reference 191 0 50 0 500 0 2 2 U 0 7 Wim K O 9 2 Wm U 0 2 Wim K re er 9 242 aT gs Bao U Dos 20 000 9 700 0 191 0 238 0 500 i Una z 4 19 Wim b 0 050 pe Figure 1 Example of a Joint U Value object You have to define the frame materials which determine the frame measurements in the opening dialog window Alternatively the kind and orientation of the frame can be set in the dialog window The type to determine the frame width Automatic 2 Constructions or 3 Constructions can be customized later in the Properties flyout cf figure 2 If the frame width is determined automatically based on the selected frame materials the method to calculate the frame width Max of projections Cold side projection Warm side projection as well as the frame materials themselves can be customized later in the Properties flyout cf figure 2 too 114 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools 47 4 Name Style Uf Value 12 4 U Value W m2 K 4 20358 4 Type Automatic 4 F
126. ata Exchange ER a E 2 Show boundary conditions preview Tools B Document Selection Model A Color E Type ETT Special Materials D Cavities Calculation Calculation Results Break after automatic material assignment Current Page Break after mesh generation Break after the calculation F Switch automatically to 1st report page after calculation 4 Automatic recalculation of all secondary results Fields Language Use customized flyout layout Show description of empty field functions Show boundary conditions preview Selection by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch Here the language of the user interface can be defined The newly defined language will become active after flixO pro is restarted Determines whether the customized or the default positions of the flyouts are used Determines whether the function instead of the invisible description of field functions with empty or invisible results should be displayed Determines whether the boundary condition lines at the surface are displayed after entering the boundary condition start points The display takes place time delayed depending on the complexity of the construction and the used hardware Nevertheless you can continue your work without any restrictions Here the line properties Color and Type can be selected with which the edges of the selected 213 Reference objec
127. ate thermal bridges e Measuring tool to measure the distance between two points in the model e Distinction of objects as graphic objects which cannot be taken into account when calculated but which as result objects e g materials can optionally be displayed e Simplified rotation of 90 e Rotate tool and an extended selection mode with an angle constriction to a multiplier of the element angle e Cut tool with additional numerical margin entries e By Min Max Temperature objects the fRsi factor and humidities can optionally be hidden e Edges inside an air cavity can optionally be ignored e Scaling factor during DXF import can be determined e Asa CSV file temperature fields can be exported e Additional model features Interior warmer than exterior for correct application of surface temperatures in hot weather climates User Interface e New arrangement of elements and Flyout domains to individually adapt the interface e Toolbox flyout broken down into Tools list Object list and Tool properties e Layers display of the current page in list form e Styles display in list form with a filter function to facilitate the search of a style e German English French and Italian User interface languages e Keyword search in the menu e All open documents can be saved with a single command all open windows can be closed with a single command e DXF import options can be activated shortly before importing by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10
128. ation of constructions using parametric components e Simple duplication of materials boundary conditions and style properties e By pressing the ALT key the Fill tool becomes a pipette tool with which material boundary condition and style properties can be selected from objects and easily assigned to other objects e Numerous new options for customizing the automatic saving interrupting and switching to the first report page e All objects of a specific object type can be selected E g with this feature all boundary conditions can be easily selected and deleted if needed e For guide lines and field functions the corresponding dialogs for the creation will be shown when accessing the property command 14 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Part Il by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Use 2 Use 2 1 User Interface Here is a basic screen shot of flixo pro with the most important components You can click on the individual symbols of the figure to jump to the corresponding documentation i File Edit View Insert Arrange Tools Results Window Help Search Keyword ay fada ECEPTE Co BA BESS urne a 43403 BE ak Sk Sa ais Si a f Ema EME Materials ax Start Page i gt 1 ax Gal xsdlav 4 Tools Lh Materials h Select Move Scale S E General A Edit O Undefined Material Rotate Ml Unventilated air cavit
129. ation details gt gt Detailed Displays the calculation details 4 4 5 22 Fields Description In this dialog window you can choose a number of field functions from a list which can be inserted into the current document The field functions are place holders Is the result field empty i e invisible then the field function descriptions can optionally be displayed instead of the results 270 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Field Field Name Author Category Comments Company Created Date Current Date Hyperlink Keywords Manager File Name gt IT Dptions with Path Description location of the document Style Arial 12pt X The file name of the document and optionally the E g Tilt and Turn Simulation_glass flx Fields Current Program Version Current Date Number of FE Number of Pages Number of Temperatures Author User defined properties File Name Template The current version of flixo pro Current date and optionally the current time Number of finite elements in the current model Total number of pages in the document Total number of unknown temperatures Author of the document The value will be taken from the document properties cf File Properties dialog window The special user defined properties of the document The value will be taken from the document properties cf File
130. ayed The graphic properties of the streamlines as well as the streamline period can be adjusted by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 191 Reference Stream Lines Style General Font Name Stream Lines Style Regular Line Line Period 1 000 W m Weight 0 000 Type Highlighted Line Period 10 2 Weight 0 000 Type Y Preview Color E S Im ox canoa Fields General Tab Name Line Period Regular Line Period 192 Here you define the name of the style You cannot leave this field empty the chosen name must be unique i e not identical to another existing name Aside from these limitations you are free to choose any name In this setting the number and density of the streamlines can be determined be defining the heat flux which flows between two neighboring streamlines This setting group determines the properties of regular streamlines color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm To make streamlines more legible you can have by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Highlighted Line Font Tab 4 4 1 8 U Value Style Description every n th highlighted with the properties you define here The specific settings of the highlighted streamlines color style thickness a
131. berstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Calculation Status Solving equation system Total time 00 02 08 Progress Mesh No of unknowns 58056 No of elements 114547 Mesh Refinement Max No of iterations 4 Cur No of iterations Temperature Dependent Values Max rel quotient 2 Cur rel quotient 0 Max No of iterations 4 Cur No of iterations 1 Solver Max rel error 1e 030 Cur rel error 2 542890e 002 Max rel Fluxbilance 0 0001 Cur rel Fluxbilance 0 295539 Max No of iterations 1000000 Cur No of iterations 710 Figure 1 In detail Fields Status Total Time Progress Number of unknowns Number of elements Max Number of iterations Current Number of iterations Y Numerical Solution WAX Status Solving equation system Total time 00 00 05 Progress coven eS Deis Figure 2 Overview Status of the calculation After a successful calculation this reads Successfully terminated If there is an error during the calculation it reads Error If the calculation has been canceled it reads Canceled Displays how long the calculation has been running for At the end of a calculation it displays the total time elapsed Progress of the calculation in percent Number of unknown temperatures which must be calculated Number of finite elements for the mesh Maximum number of iterations for the calculation for the calcula
132. bject can be defined in the Style list in the Information tool properties see figure 2 The list shows all styles for information objects that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new information object will always be created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles flyout or inthe Style drop down list in the Information tool properties The styles can be also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 Properties Style Information 2 Figure 2 Information tool properties Oiio e This tool can only be used on the report page and only if result objects of a previously calculated model are present by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 137 Reference 4 1 24 Line Tool Use Description The Line tool allows you to create lines that help you arrange a report How do activate it The Line tool can be activated with the command Line in the menu Insert or by clicking on I the icon in the Toolbox flyout When the tool is active the mouse becomes a 1 How do use it Mouse To create a line two steps are required Click on the spot where the line should begin The line is defined as soon as you click on the desired endpoint If you would like to interrupt the entry process then you can right click and
133. board either as an embedded or linked object This can be done in the corresponding dialog window By embedded objects the data in the flixo pro document is not changed when you change the original data Embedded objects become a part of the flixo pro document after they are added Double click on the embedded object to work with it in its original program By linked objects the data will only be updated when the corresponding original file e g spreadsheet is modified Linked data is saved in the original file Flixo pro only saves the file path of the original file and displays the linked data Deletes everything that is currently selected A submenu with commands to select different object groups A submenu with commands to adjust the size materials and boundary conditions in the current document A submenu with commands to define or change a parametric object The creation and use of parametric objects is explained in Tutorial 6 A submenu with commands to define or change a layered parametric object A submenu with commands to define or change an equivalent 3 dimensional element with regular distances as approximation e g screw according to prEN ISO 12631 A submenu with commands to define or change a graphic object Displays the Properties dialog window for the selected object by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Menu Commands 4 2 2 1 Edit Menu Submenu Select A
134. boundaries of the construction which come into question for the definition of the surface line will appear as a dashed line Move the mouse to the desired endpoint The dashed line now highlights those parts for which the minimum average and maximum surface temperature and the fRsi factor the condensation zone the surface temperature and critical room humidities for the minimum temperature is calculated and shown The surface line is defined as soon as you click on the endpoint If the SHIFT key is pressed while you define the surface line then the first click sets the start and endpoints automatically at the adjacent adiabatic edges e g construction sections If the start and endpoints lie on the exterior boundary of a construction then flixo pro calculates the minimum and optionally the maximum surface temperature cf Min Max by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 91 Reference 92 Temperature style dialog window on the Extended tab along with the critical room humidity for the line segment which leads counterclockwise from the start to the endpoint if the start and endpoint lie on an interior boundary e g the interior boundary of an entire chimney then the calculation for the line segment is a carried out clockwise The values of the minimum and maximum surface temperatures can be displayed at the corresponding positions in addition with the minimum temperature spot the fRsi factor
135. can also have a rectangular cross section Averaged surface properties of cavities can either be adjusted like before directly to the cavity material or newly be calculated by flixo pro for the 4 main directions based on the current surface properties Cavity surface properties can either be set directly with the Boundary Condition tool or automatically assigned by the Cavity EN ISO 10077 2 tool based on the material emissivities table Beside the condensation zone flixo pro can highlight zones where the humidity exceed the critical surface humidity by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 11 12 DXF Import If desired materials can be assigned automatically to the domains based on the layer assignment in the DXF file It s possible to convert only a partial part of a DXF file cf Crop tool Accelerated deletion of lines and polylines Optionally DXF layers which are marked as hidden in the DXF file can be ignored if they should be imported they are initially hidden in flixO pro too and not visible Zoom possibilities for layer preview The DXF object 3DFACE gets recognized and imported User Interface Tools to create new objects like flux objects etc can be configured as Multiple Use tool or as Simple Use tool For tools which create new objects the Select Move Scale tool can temporarily be activated by pressing the Alt key after releasing the Alt key the previous tool is active again The Select Move
136. can be adapted in the Boundary Condition dialog window Grouping Boundary Conditions into Categories If you are using many boundary conditions it makes sense to organize these into groups or categories Categories are comparable to file folders and directories this is why they have the same symbol Upon creation every document generates a General category You can create further categories by clicking on the icon in the flyout or by right clicking on an existing category and using the context menu command New Category The category is created within the selected category You can also define a name for this category To delete a category select the category and click on the x icon or use the context menu command right click Delete You can rename a category by selecting it and then clicking on the Ej or by using either the context menu command right click Edit or Rename Alternatively you can rename the category by selecting it and then clicking on it again to rename it just as you would rename a file under Windows Explorer Only empty categories can be deleted To move a boundary condition from one category to another you can simply drag the boundary condition with the mouse into the desired category Copying Boundary Conditions You can copy boundary conditions from the database to the boundary conditions list of the current document or vice versa by dragging the boundary condition to the desired location Exporting and Impo
137. can temporarily activate the Select Move Scale tool by pressing the ALT key After releasing the ALT key the previous tool is active again If this option is selected you can activate the Select Move Scale tool by pressing the ESC key After releasing the ESC key the current selection is canceled The entries are limited to whole numbered multipliers of the selected element angle The constrained angle is activated by keeping the Shift key held down Using this tool list you can define which tools should have a multiple use mode by default and which tools automatically activate the Select Move Scale tool after finishing an action Tools with a single use mode can temporarily be set in the multiple use mode by double clicking on the symbol in the Tools flyout The following settings are generally used by all tools to capture on other objects during the input These settings can be adjusted via the corresponding tool context menu or by clicking on the ld icon on the standard toolbar by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 223 Reference Options Y eS B Application 2 General User Interface h ae Y Activate Snap To Object Database T emplates HEPER Basic Units 4 Endpoint Derived units 4 Middlepoint Data Exchange 4 Intersection DXF Import F Extension SVG Import Export 2 Tools Perpendicular General Parallel Object Capturing Neares
138. cannot leave this field empty the chosen name must be unique i e not identical to another existing name Aside from these limitations you are free to choose any name Digits Number of decimal places or significant digits which are to be displayed The kind Decimal Points or Significant you can select using the adjacent drop down list Thousands delimiter thousands 182 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch The digits left of the decimal point will be grouped into Dialog Windows Show units Show result symbol Style Line End Point Markers Extended Tab Temperature fRSi Value Surface humidity Room humidity for condensation Room humidity for moisture Condensation zone The appropriate units will be shown after each numerical value The units can be adjusted in the Units tab of the Options dialog window The appropriate symbols dependent on the type of value will be shown before each numerical value Here you determine whether the label line should be a simple or an orthogonal right angle bent line This setting group determines the properties of label lines color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm Here you can determine how the end of both label lines should look like There are two drop down lists that show the different possibilities If this option is activat
139. ccount heat fluxes into the system are positive heat fluxes out of the system are negative e If there are more than 2 boundary condition temperatures in the model then the Y value depends on the temperature relations and is not valid for other boundary condition temperatures The rule for the calculation of the needed temperature difference must be defined in the Properties flyout O e This tool can only be used on the report page and only if result objects of a previously calculated model are present e Neither interior edges nor heat sources can be present 4 1 21 3 Edge Spacer Use Physics Limitations Description With the Psi Value tool kind Edge Spacer you can calculate the Y values of glazing spacers or edge influences of frames according to EN ISO 10077 2 The Y value which quantifies additional energy is a correction value that is caused by linear shaped thermal bridges and is not taken into account in 1 dimensional energy calculations with U values The magnitude of the Y value depends on several values the quality of the construction the quality of the measurements as well as the U value which calculates the loss of heat of the undisturbed component Hence it is possible that a poorly insulating flat roof protection has a better Y value than a well insulating window wall junction because in the case of the former the calculation of the Y value is done with exterior measurements through which part of the energ
140. ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 13 New 1 4 What s new in version 4 1 Here are some of the new features and improvements in flixO pro version 4 1 Models and Results e Automatic filling of not fully enclosed or not materialized cavities according to EN ISO 10077 2 with a new wizard e Defining of parametric objects constructed only by material layers with a new wizard and the application of these objects in the construction e Defining of glass units with a given U value with a new wizard and the application of these objects in the construction e Comprehensive replacement of materials in all domains by another material as well as comprehensive replacements of boundary conditions of all boundary condition objects by another one e Data can be imported and exported from and to other applications by using the Building SVG Interface Beside the geometry other information describing the construction e g material properties will be considered while importing Depending on the program the export data can be processed further e g a direct presentation of results in an Internet Browser e Optionally the fRsi factor including surface and critical room humidity can be shown for any surface point e The greatest density can be used as a criteria for the automatic assignment of materials from domains with non defined material properties Miscellaneous e Library with numerous components like window walls floors etc for fast gener
141. ch for a file These keywords also allow for a detailed description of the construction which can also be inserted using field functions by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 243 Reference into a document see tutorial 5 tutorial4_2_DE flx Properties ua x gt General Summary Contents Custom Title Tutorial 4 Subject Author Paul Assistant Manager Company Infomind Category uf Keywords Comments a Template normal_DE fit 58 Fields Title Title of the document the title can be used to search for a file Subject Subject of the document the subject can be used to search for a file Author Author of the document Manager Manager of the document Company Company of the document Category Category of the document the category can be used to search for a file Keywords Keywords that can be used to search for a file Comments Desired comments can be entered Template Name of the template that the document is based on 4 4 4 3 Content Properties Description This tab shows the content of the document with the names of all the report pages 244 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows tutorial4_ 4 EN fix Properties 4 4 4 4 Custom Properties Description In this tab individual values of various characteristics are defined tutorial4_4_EN fix Properties Le e
142. ck on a point where you would like the first corner to be When you now move the mouse an outline of that result object appears and will constantly be adjusted until you click again now defining the second corner point You can stop the entry process by either right clicking and choosing the command Cancel or by hitting the ESC key If a model has not yet been calculated the result object is simply a rectangular place holder After the calculation the place holder will automatically be filled with the result object according to the indicated Result Object styles properties If there are multiple models in the document the model on which the result object refers can be selected in the Model list cf figure 1 and cf figure 2 Attributes that should be shown by default when a result object is created in flixo pro can be defined in the corresponding Options dialog window Application gt Tools gt Result Object Tool If additional legends attributes or global results like isotherms need to be shown you can adjust the object in the Result Object Properties dialog window You can access the Result Object Properties dialog window by right clicking and choosing context menu command Properties with the menu command Edit Properties or by hitting Alt Return Alternatively you can adjust the properties directly in the Properties flyout cf figure 1 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 85 Reference
143. ck on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 3 Summary 36 Imported DXF data are converted to flixo pro domains by clicking on the DXF Compran button in the DXF Import message bar or by chosing the menu command Tool DXF Conversion respectively by clicking on the according Micon in the standard toolbar All closed regions are automatically inserted into the model page By clicking on the Ss button in the DXF Import message bar the next problem spot is enlarged There are two types of problem spots Edges that are not used and line segments which are not closed Edges which are not used can be deleted or ignored and line segments which are not closed can be closed with the Select Move Scale tool i After the conversion and as soon as all problem spots are solved the program skips automatically onto the report page Even if problem spots still exist you can open the model page in which all existing domains are shown by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Window Frame Analysis and Wizards 3 4 Window Frame Analysis and Wizards In this tutorial wizards and the modeling and calculation of window frame U values with flixo pro is explained The goal of this tutorial is to make the window frame which was imported in tutorial 3 for the analysis of the window frame U value conform to European Standards In addition we will examine correct boundary condition assignment materi
144. coefficient 101 Heat transfer resistance 101 Help 157 Contents 157 Context Help 175 Online 157 Tutorials 157 Hidden Lines 54 Hide Boundary Condition Legend 239 Boundary Conditions 239 Graphic Objects 239 Heat Density Field 239 Isotherms 239 Labels 239 Material Borders 239 Material Legend 239 Materials 239 Room Temperatures 239 Stream Lines 239 Temperature Field 239 Hor Mirroring 152 How do activate it 70 How do activate it 59 62 64 66 69 72 73 75 77 80 83 84 87 91 96 98 100 101 105 109 113 117 121 122 126 131 135 136 138 139 140 141 142 How do use it 59 62 64 66 69 70 72 73 75 77 80 83 84 87 91 96 98 100 101 105 109 113 117 121 122 126 131 135 136 138 139 140 141 142 Humidities 87 Hyperlink 270 302 Import of DXF Files 33 Import Properties adjust 34 Importing 277 DXF Files 143 ISO2 Files 143 SVG Files 143 Importing ISO2 Files 143 Information on material domains 136 Information Style Properties 205 Information Tool 136 Insert Air Cavity EN ISO 10077 2 150 Boundary Condition 150 Dimension 150 Ellipse 150 Elliptical Domain 150 Field 150 Glas Unit 150 Information 150 Layer Object 150 Line 150 Object 150 Picture 150 Polygon Domain 150 Polyline 150 Rectangle 150 Rectangular Domain 150 Text 150 Insert corner point 62 Insert document name 49 Insert field 150 Insert field functions 49 Insert glass unit 150 Insert layer
145. creation is demonstrated by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 267 Reference New Component Name Last modified Persist as File name From selection F rom f e Alu Spacel The file does not exist Alu Spacer fcp C Program Files infomind flixo 5 db A Fields Name Modified File Name Directory From selection From file 4 4 5 21 Calculation Description Here the name of the component is defined You cannot leave this field empty and the chosen name must be unique i e it cannot be identical to the name of another component be it in an open document or be it in the application Aside from these restrictions you can choose any name Shows the modification date File name under which the component was saved Directory in which the components are will be saved When you click on the button a standard fie dialog window is opened Here you can either select the component you would like to load radio button From file or define the file path from a selection From selection to create a new component file If you select this option a new component is created from the selected object in the current document If you select this option a previously saved component with the entered file path will be loaded In this dialog window the calculation progress and the chosen calculation options are displayed 268 by infomind gmbh we
146. ct 105 Fill air cavities automatically 77 Heat Flux Density Object 96 Heat Flux Object 98 Information Object 136 Line 138 Material Polygon Domain 75 Material Rectangle Domain 72 Minimum Maximum Surface Temperatures 91 Polyline 139 Psi Value Object 121 Psi Value Object 2 Constructions 122 Psi Value Object 3 Constructions 126 Psi Value Object Edge Spacer 131 Rectangle 140 Result Object 84 Temperature Object 87 Text 142 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Uf Value Object 109 Usb Value Object 117 UTJ Value Object 113 U Value Object 100 Create new default file after program launch 211 Create New File 143 Create new style 167 Create New Window 157 Create Polyline 139 Create Rectangle 140 Created Date 270 Creating aNew Component 168 Creating anew layer 159 Creating and Duplicating a Style 167 Creation Modification Duplication and Deletion of Boundary Conditions 164 Creation Modification Duplication and Deletion of Materials 161 Critical materials Check for material before calculation 228 Critical Room Densities 91 Crop Tool 83 Cropping of result objects 83 Ctri Key 293 Current Date 270 Cut 145 Cut materialdomains 66 D Database Boundary Conditions 164 Components 168 Material 161 Update 249 Define 3D equivalent Object 145 Define Frame materials 240 252 Define Graphic Object 145 Define Heat Flux 98 Define Minimum Temperature 91 Define Parameter 145 Define Surface Line 98
147. ctions which have 2 connected constructions You can also calculate joint Y values YTJ Values according to EN 13947 using this tool The Psi Value tool allows you to calculate the Y values previously linear k value The Y value which quantifies additional energy is a correction value that is caused by linear shaped thermal bridges and is not taken into account in 1 dimensional energy calculations with U values The magnitude of the Y value depends on several values the quality of the construction the quality of the dimensions as well as the U value which calculates the loss of heat of the undisturbed component Hence it is possible that a poorly insulating flat roof protection has a better Y value than a well insulating window wall junction because in the case of the former the calculation of the Y value is done with exterior measurements through which part of the energy is already covered by thermal bridge energy losses by flat roof and wall measurements Y values can also be negative The calculation of Y values is explained in detail in tutorial 5 How do activate it The Psi Value tool can be activated with the menu command Psi Value in the menu Results or by clicking on the Y iconinthe Toolbox flyout Then select the kind 2 Constructions in I the tool properties cf figure 2 When the tool is active the mouse becomesa How do use it To calculate the Psi value three points are required the first two point
148. ctive document Styles can be added or deleted and their properties changed Styles allow you to define how data such as isotherms Psi values Heat fluxes U values lines rectangles text etc are displayed All objects will be created according to the style which is active in the flyout You can also define new styles or change existing styles Styles can be assigned to objects by dragging them onto the object The list of styles is organized into various categories Each category contains a type of style More detailed information to the styles can be found in the corresponding Styles dialog window Styles ax Styles ax vu Ef gt i Ej val Name Type ajya Filter field Type Heat flux Boundaries Psi Vra Psi Value Heat flux 3 Boundaries U Value U Value Dimension Dimension Ueq Value Ueq Value Information Information Uf Value Uf Value Isotherms Isotherms 0 Isotherm Isotherms 10 Isotherm Isotherms Legends Legends 7 Black 0 2 Line Min Max Temperatures Min Max Psi Value Psi Value Red black bordered Region Result Object Result Obj Stream Lines Style Stream Lin Table Legends Table Lege Temperatures Temperat Arial 12pt Text Arial 6pt Text Arial 8pt Text a iL C M Ge Bc gc 9s A L Eg M C2 BC 8 C B S Figure 1 Styles flyout Figure 2 View after filtered for val by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 167 Referenc
149. d gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Default Name 4 4 2 12 Model Description step these cavities will automatically be assigned the neighboring material Prefix for the names of the automatically created radiation surface properties This setting depends on the User Interface language Inthe Model options dialog window the orientation construction size and scale settings are determined The scale can be chosen from a predefined list of scales or it can be individually defined by determining a ratio Options MAS E Application amp Document Special Materials Cavities Calculation Results Current Page Drientation Horizontal section Vertical section Undefined Climate 4 Interior warmer than exterior Fields Orientation Interior warmer that exterior Here you can determine whether the construction input is a horizontal or a vertical cross section This option is only necessary if you are using special glass unit materials If the orientation is defined you can adjust it by either activating the context menu right click on the CJ icon or by double clicking Select this option if the exterior temperature is warmer than the interior temperature in the model by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 227 Reference 4 4 2 13 Special Materials Description This option only has an influenc
150. d in the Layers flyout You can also hide guidelines by making the respective layer invisible Snap to Grid Guidelines Toggles the Snap to Grid Snap to Guidelines functions On the Snap toolbar these options are represented by the icons and Br Grid as Lines Dots Determines whether the grid is displayed as lines or dots Note that not all snap points are shown Snap to object Toggles the Snap to Object function On the Snap toolbar function is represented by the ld icon 4 4 2 18 Guidelines Description The two dialog windows Horizontal Guidelines and Vertical Guidelines are used to set modify and delete guidelines The pages are identical except for that they apply to two different sets of guidelines one to the horizontal guidelines and the other to the vertical guidelines Use of guidelines is described in more detail in tutorial 6 A The settings always correspond to the active page see tabs on the lower edge of the application window A detailed description Enter the exact coordinate of the guideline into the text field and then click Add or adjust the coordinate of an existing guideline by selecting the guideline from the list entering the new coordinate for the guideline and then clicking on Move The unit can be chosen from the drop down list The default unit is set in the Unit Options dialog window by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 235 Reference
151. d in the fields marked with x and y the width can be entered in the field marked b and the height can be entered in the h field The Reference Point Control symbolized by determines the position that defines the reference point The reference point can be a corner midpoint or the center of an object The selected point is marked in red and can be changed with the mouse or the arrow keys by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools When all the parameters have been defined then you can finish the process by clicking on the Create key Defining Materials A new domain will always be created with the material which is selected in the Materials table You can change the material of domains you want to create either by changing the selection in the Materials table or by choosing the material from the drop down list Polycarbonates 1 You can also change the material of the domain afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see also tutorial 1 Reference Point hor Left y ver Top 2 Position and Dimension 10 000 mm 15 000 mm W 300 000mm h 200 Create Properties Mater Slightly ventilated air ca y Extended Figure 1 Rectangular Domain properties 4 1 9 Elliptical Domain Tool Use Limitations Description The Elliptical Domain tool allows you to create elliptical shapes and circular a
152. d the grid is located on the grid layer The grid layer cannot be modified The Model Page has an extra layer the Model layer Here you will find the physical information that flixo pro uses for the calculation and analysis This layer cannot be modified Each report page contains an extra layer the Reference layer for the individual layers of the Master Page The reference layer can be hid and unhidden printed or not printed The by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Flyout reference layer abbreviated Ref shows all the corresponding layers on the Master Page Changes to the original objects or renaming of the layers must take place on the Master Page itself Typical elements which are located on the Master Page are company logos and other stationary type elements These elements appear automatically on all the pages of the report Additional information can be found in tutorial 6 Creating a New Layer To create a new layer click on the Y icon in the flyout or choose the context menu command right click New Layer on either one of the layers already on the page or on the page category name of the page The new layer will be added to the list Deleting a Layer To delete a layer click on the X icon or choose the context menu command right click Delete of the corresponding layer you wish to remove Please note that there must be at least one user layer present in the page because editing
153. dary conditions list current document and for the lower list database To create a new boundary condition click on the 2 icon in the flyout Alternatively you can use the context menu command right click New Boundary Condition The new material can be defined in the Boundary Condition dialog window After you have defined the properties click on OK and the new boundary condition appears in the active category If you would like to modify the properties of an existing boundary condition select it in the list and click either on the E icon or use the context menu command right click Edit or double click on the boundary condition you wish to edit This opens the same dialog window that is used to define a new boundary condition You can now modify the properties of the boundary condition If you wish to rename a material you can do so by choosing the context menu command right click Rename You can also rename the boundary condition by selecting it and then clicking on its name just as you would rename a file under Windows Explorer To duplicate a boundary condition entry with an unique name click on the icon in the flyout Alternatively you can create a duplicate by using the corresponding command in the context menu right click Duplicate All properties of the copy are identical with the ones of by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 165 Reference the source if needed the properties
154. ditions Boundary Condition lt boundary condition name gt Drop down list 4 4 3 4 Result Object Properties Description x and y coordinates which apply to the vertex that is currently selected from the list x coordinate of the currently selected vertex indicated in the selected unit y coordinate of the currently selected vertex indicated in the selected unit Total number of boundary conditions for a specific domain Here you can choose the boundary condition whose style should appear first in the drop down list or whose style can be edited Here you can edit the style of the currently selected boundary condition This is a dialog window for result objects see Result Object tool on report pages This is not to be confused with the domain objects on the model page The dialog window has two tabs a General tab and a Result Object tab containing specific settings for result objects Result Object Properties 4 X General Result Object Filling Components y Isotherms Boundary Conditions Temperature field Materials Stream Lines Radiation Properties Heat Density Field Room Temperatures Graphic Objects Material Borders y Labels Legends Material Legend Boundary Condition Legend cana Fields Isotherms This option allows you to display the isotherms for the Temperature Field result object This option allows you to display the temperature field for by infomind gmbh weberstrass
155. dows are open Arranges the active window in a new horizontal tab group This menu command is only visible if at least 2 document windows are open Closes all active windows If you did not save a document you will be prompted to do so Shows a list with all the active documents Displays a dialog window with all the active documents Opens the flixO Pro manual Opens the flixo pro website with additional help functions Displays the list of all tutorials Checks if the installed version of flixo pro is the most recent version or if there are any updates or service releases to be found Depending on the settings these updates and service releases will be downloaded from the internet and installed A You need access to the Internet to check for updates A You need a write permission for the download 157 Reference folder in order to check for updates About flixo Displays the dialog window About flixo 4 3 Flyout Flyouts are windows which you can position arrange and compile as you wish A Flyout can take on the four following properties e Floating e Dockable e Auto Hide e Hide You can choose the properties in the Flyout menu located at the top of the window Dockable or Auto Hide Ax Close Flyout Menu Floating flyout windows can be placed anywhere within an application window In the default setting of flixo pro see User Interface there are no floating flyouts Dockable f
156. drop down list in the Heat Flux tool properties The styles can be also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 99 Reference Properties Style Heat flux 2 m Extended Figure 3 Heat Flux tool properties On e This tool can only be used on the report page and only if result objects of a previously calculated model are present Start and endpoints can only be mesh points The surface line will automatically snap to the mesh point when it is drawn Start and endpoints of the border line or of the surface line must be on the surface of the construction The start and endpoints of the border line or the surface line must be able to be joined by a line 4 1 20 U Value Tool Use Description The U Value tool allows you e to prompt the U Value for any given construction section e to calculate Equivalent U Values of constructions with periodic thermal bridges e to calculate Frame U Values according to EN ISO 10077 2 standard e to calculate Joint U Values of frame constructions according to EN 13947 and to label them in the reports How do activate it The U Value tool can be activated with the command U Value in the menu Results or by clicking on the IH icon in the Toolbox flyout Then you have to define the U value kind in the tool properties cf figure 1
157. dung Vollsturz a Vordersturz a Window Frames EE Spacer g IV Stainless Steel Spacer amp IV Aluminium Spacer 4 m r m A L Go Ge Bc Gc B S Figure 1 Components flyout Creating a New Component Creating a component can be done in two different ways Either a part of a document can be turned into a component selection or the component can be created from an existing file From an Existing File Components created by flixo pro are saved with the fcp file extension For example the components Window is normally saved in the Frame fcp To integrate an existing component file proceed as follows e Switch to the Component tab and either click on the 7 icon or select the command New Component from the context menu right click of the category e Change the option to From File if you have a selected object in the current document by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 169 Reference the option From selection is marked by default in the appearing dialog window e In the file dialog window choose the respective component e Confirm by clicking OK After this process you will find the new component in the components list From Selection To create a new component from a document proceed as follows e First select the object s within the document which will form the component use the Select Move Scale tool e With the Drag amp Drop functi
158. e Creating and Duplicating a Style You can create a new style by clicking on the icon the corresponding category name or another style of the corresponding category must be marked or by right clicking on a category or a style within the category where you would like to create a new style and use the command New Style In the appearing dialog window you can define the properties of the new style To duplicate a style entry with an unique name click on the icon in the flyout Alternatively you can create a duplicate by using the corresponding command in the context menu right click on the source entry Duplicate All properties of the copy are identical with the ones of the source if needed the properties can be adapted in the corresponding style dialog window Changing and Deleting a Style To change a style select it and click on the Ej icon in the top part of the flyout or choose the context menu command right click Edit When you want to rename a style then select the style and choose the command Rename from the context menu right click You can also rename a style by selecting it and then clicking on its name just as you would rename a file under Windows Explorer You can delete a style by selecting it and clicking on the X icon or by choosing the context menu command right click Delete Note that at least one style per category must be present Search Styles Sort Views You can also search the list for pa
159. e C Be exterior boundary condition temperature C Be min lowest exterior boundary condition temperature C The external temperature on which the calculation of the temperature factor fRsi is based can be adjusted in the Properties Flyout cf Figure 1 Surface humidity osi This is the humidity on the surface of the minimum temperature point for the humidity given in the parentheses The room humidity of the bordering room is defined in the Properties flyout The surface humidity depends on the selected interior temperature and room humidity Thus the surface humidity must be respectively calculated for different interior temperatures and room humidities Room humidity 100 is shown where condensation forms If the room humidity is equal or higher than the calculated room humidity 100 as in the example above 49 then condensation forms at this spot This value depends on the selected interior temperature and therefore the room humidity must be respectively calculated for different interior temperatures Room humidity 980 is shown at the surface temperature spot where the surface humidity is 80 In the example above with a 39 room humidity there would be an 80 humidity at that minimum surface temperature spot This value depends on the selected interior temperature and therefore the room humidity must be respectively calculated for different interior temperatures The critical surface humidity e g to analyse a po
160. e 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 239 Reference Stream Lines Heat Density Field Boundary Condition Materials Room Temperatures Graphic Objects Material Borders Labels Material Legend Boundary Condition Legend 4 4 3 5 Frame or Joint U Value Properties Description the result object Only one of the following settings can be selected heat density temperature or material This option allows you to display the stream lines for the result object This option allows you to display the heat flux density for the result object Only one of the following settings can be selected heat density temperature or materials This option allows you to display the selected boundary condition for the result object This option allows you to display the selected material for this result object Only one of the following settings can be selected heat density temperature or materials This option allows you to display the room temperatures in the result object The colors of the temperatures correspond to those of the temperature landscapes This option allows you to display graphic objects that facilitate the interpretation of the illustration but that are not taken into account in the calculation This option allows you to display the material borders in the result object This option allows you to display point labels for the results of the result object This option allows you to display a
161. e Crop tool allows you to crop the visible part of a result object and hide parts of that same object It is possible for example to display only a part of a construction in a report After magnifying such a section details will become more apparent The Crop tool also allows you to select a specific range of an imported DXF sketch which should be converted How do activate it The Crop tool can be activated with the command Crop in the menu Tools or by clicking on the Pr icon in the Toolbox flyout When the tool is active the mouse cursor becomes a EL How do use it Cropping Mouse Select the object that you would like to crop with either the Select Move Scale tool or with the Crop tool Activate the Crop tool Is the mouse cursor positioned over a small square at a corner of a result object then the mouse cursor changes its symbol By clicking and moving this corner with the mouse button held down you can crop the object When you release the mouse button the object will be cropped Alternatively it is also possible to click on a point within the result object and create a rectangle Consequently only the domain within this area will be visible After an object has been cropped the visible domain can be altered by clicking on a point within this domain and by moving it with the mouse button held down Cropping Keyboard Enter the following edges in the Crop tool properties Left Top Right and Bottom see
162. e Select Move Scale tool You can now activate the properties with the Tab key or by clicking on a field You can activate the individual fields by repeatedly hitting the Tab key or by using the Tab key while the Shift key is held down The x and y fields are relevant for the position of the object These fields are the coordinates of the reference point The red point on the reference point control indicates which point on the object corner midpoint or object center is to take the coordinates You can change the reference point after activating it with Tab with the arrow keys or with the mouse You can finish the input by either clicking on the Apply button or by activating it with the Tab key and then hitting Return You can also move an object a little at a time vertically and horizontally with the arrow keys 5 y 41 402 mm You can change the size of the selected object by entering the width and the height eon of the bounding rectangle You can finish the input by either clicking on the Apply button or by activating it with the Tab key and then hitting Return You can change the scale of the selected object by entering a value into the field marked with a Within the upper field you change the width by the corresponding magnitude within the lower field you change the height If the scaling should be done proportionally you can activate the option Lock aspect You can then finish the input by either clicking on b
163. e You can adjust the other properties of the Psi value calculation in the Properties flyout O Click here or on the navigation buttons in the title in order to continue with the tutorial 3 5 3 Edge Psi Value Edge Psi Values according to EN ISO 10077 2 are calculated for the thermal evaluation of spacers and glazing edges Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 5 46 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Psi Value and U Value Calculations Summary e An edge Psi value according to EN ISO 10077 2 is calculated with the Psi Value tool Edge Spacer This happens in 2 steps First select the result object for which you want to calculate the edge Psi value second select the file with the frame U value calculation e The path of the file with the frame U value calculation can be adjusted in the Properties Flyout O Click here or on the navigation buttons in the title in order to continue with the tutorial 3 5 4 Equivalent U Value Equivalent U Values are usefully calculated for constructions with periodically appearing thermal bridges e g ceiling construction with rafter The equivalent U value considers already the influence of these thermal bridges Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 5 Summary e An equivalent U value is defined using the U Value tool Equivalent U Value by applying with 3 mouse clicks The first two points define the
164. e calculated for other heat transfer resistances respectively coefficients than the ones given in the model you can adjust them in the Properties flyout cf figure 2 102 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools Properties ax AR Selected Object 2 Name Style U Wert ee Results U Value W m2 K 1 16861 Calculation Custom 9 Re m2 K W 0 040 Ri m2 K W 0 130 m Dimension Reference Point x mm 151 502 y mm 166 038 Width mm 42 313 Height mm 22 581 v Figure 2 Properties flyout of an U value object Defining Styles The presentation of an U value object can be defined in the Style list in the U Value tool properties see figure 3 The list shows all styles for U value objects that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new U value object will always be created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles flyout orinthe Style drop down list in the U Value tool properties The styles can also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 Properties Kind Parallel Layers Style U Value ha la Figure 3 U Value tool properties Results To receive significant results the following conditions have to be fulfilled e U values should only be calc
165. e on the surface temperature labeling In this dialog window you can set the necessary parameters for the material wizard In tutorial 4 the use of this wizard is explained in further detail Before calculating domains with specific materials can automatically be edited Options Y ES E Application B Document ho z Critical Materials Special Materials y rp Y Check for material s before calculation Cavities Calculation Name Undefined Material Results S Curent Page Small Domains v Automatically assign materials For areas smaller than 0 1 2 mm With the material of the neighbor with the greatest area X Marker color u v OK Cancel Fields Check for material s before calculation Name Automatically assign materials 228 Checks all visible domains to see if a certain material which should not be in use is being used If this option is checked then the model will not only be searched for critical material but small domains with critical material will be assigned material according to determined standards and larger domains will be highlighted The name of the critical material s which should not be present in the model If more than one type of material is critical then each material name should be surrounded by quotation marks and separated by a comma E g Critical Material 1 Critical Material 2 Determines whether domains that do not exceed a certain
166. e source file flixo proonly saves the file path and displays a representation of the linked file A submenu with commands to change the order and therefore also the visibility of objects A submenu with commands to change the position of an object relative to another object A submenu with commands to change the dimensions of an object Groups the selected objects grouped objects behave as if they were a single object Dissolves the grouping s Unites the selected objects see also Unification Operation Intersects the selected objects see also Intersection Operation Subtracts the last marked object from the previously selected object s see also Subtraction Operation Mirrors the selected object horizontally Mirrors the selected object vertically Rotates the selected object s 90 clockwise Rotates the selected object s 90 counterclockwise Toggles the grid alignment of objects If the Snap to Grid function is active then the mouse can by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Menu Commands only define points which are on the grid This function however can also be used in conjunction with other the functions Snap to Guidelines or Snap to Objects The grid refinement can be changed in the Options dialog window which can be activated with the menu command Tools Options br Snap to Guidelines Toggles the guideline alignment of objects If the Snap to Guid
167. e wheel should directly zoom the illustration or whether it should take on the normal scroll function If this option is not marked the illustration is enlarged or reduced by turning the mouse wheel while the CTRL key is held down The activated mouse wheel can be used in an active window only To activate a window simply chick somewhere within by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Activate the Pan function Extended selection mode Merge Edit and Selection tool Activate alternate tool ESC activates Selection tool Constrain angle Multiple use 4 4 2 9 Object Capturing Description the window Determines whether the Pan function is activated when clicking on the middle mouse button Pan is a function that moves the visible section of the application window without changing the illustration size The extended selection mode is dependent on the position of the start and end point If the start point lies left of end point of the selection rectangle then not only all objects located within this rectangle will be selected but also objects that are crossed by the selection rectangle will be marked In the normal selection mode only objects lying completely within the selection rectangle are highlighted If this option is selected then the Edit tool and the Select Move Scale tool is merged on the report pages in a single tool If this option is selected you
168. ect only Resolution Resolution at which the picture file should be exported 4 4 5 29 Materials and Boundary Conditions Description In the Materials and Boundary Conditions dialog window all the materials and boundary conditions are listed when importing an ATHENA file For a successful import all conductivities must be defined By double clicking on an entry or 278 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows by selecting an entry and then clicking on the Edit button you can adjust the values An dialog window is only used when importing geometries and materials from the Athena CAD program Materialien und Randbedingungen q E x Folgende Materialien und Randbedingungen wurden importiert F r eine erfolgreiche Analyse m ssen alle Daten definiert sein Doppelklicken Sie auf einem Eintrag um die Werte zu ndern Material tambdafwimk 160 000 Nicht definiert Nicht definiert 0 200 Standard 20 000 7 700 Bearbeiten Abbrechen Hilfe Fields Edit Activates independently from the selected entries either the Materials or the Boundary Conditions dialog window OK Assumes all of the new conductivity values and adjusts all of the boundary conditions Cancel Cancels the entire action The file will not be imported 4 4 5 30 Protect Object Description In this dialog window you can protect certain parameters and sizes of an object against modificati
169. ed You can t adjust this field Filter only returns documents whose names match the exact Name Documents which have identical names with at least one other domain will not be returned Enables case sensitive search criteria The search result is always sorted by the name The filter results will be arranged in ascending order alphabetical or numerical The filter results will be arranged in descending order alphabetical or numerical In this dialog window you can map each DXF layer to a material which will be used in the DXF conversion step The automatic material assignment on converting DXF files is described in detail in tutorial 3 In the table you can either select a material from the existing materials or you can create a new material in the opening Material dialog window by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Layer Material Assignment Method Material choice Layer Mapping Layer Materials AM_2 Aluminium Si alloys AMS EPDM ethylene propylene di AM1 Illen 0 Undefined Material Inherit me Fields Assign material Inherit OK Cancel In this list you can define the characteristics of the material assignment when converting imported DXF data Layer The material which is defined in the layer material mapping table is assigned automatically to all objects lying on the DXF layer Layer only closed objects The material wh
170. ed the minimal surface temperature is displayed At least one option of the group Shown Properties has to be selected If this option is activated the fRSi factor is shown additionally to the minimal surface temperature At least one option of the group Shown Properties has to be selected If this option is activated the surface humidity is shown additionally to the minimal surface temperature At least one option of the group Shown Properties has to be selected If this option is activated the room humidity for condensation is shown additionally to the minimal surface temperature At least one option of the group Shown Properties has to be selected If this option is activated the room humidity for moisture is shown additionally to the minimal surface temperature At least one Option of the group Shown Properties has to be selected If this option is activated a condensation zone will be displayed with a unique line style only if a condensation zone is present The properties of the polyline you can adapt in the setting group line by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 183 Reference properties Of Condensation zone Moisture zone If this option is activated zones where the surface humidity exceed the critical humidity will be displayed with a unique line style only if this zone is present The properties of the polyline you can adapt in the setting group line properties Of
171. eference points divide the surface line in 3 domains with different U values Then you have to determine the kind and position of the reference point in the Properties flyout cf figure 1 First or Second if one connection is thermal bridge free or Both if both by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools thermal junctions have the same Y value You can enter the U value of the middle construction either directly with the keyboard or fetch it with the tool cf figure 1 by clicking on an U value object in another file The surface line is defined by the input of the start and end points First click on the spot where the surface line should begin The boundaries of the construction which come into question for the surface line will be highlighted as a dashed line Move your mouse counterclockwise to the desired endpoint The dashed line now shows the segment through which the heat flux will be calculated As soon as you click on the endpoint the line will be defined If the SHIFT key is pressed while you define the surface line then the first click sets the start and endpoints automatically at the adjacent adiabatic edges e g construction sections The Psi value will be displayed and the start and end points of the surface line will be labeled If you want to interrupt the line input process then you can use context menu right click command Cancel or you can hit the ESC key You can change
172. eight of the object indicated in the selected unit by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 237 Reference 4 4 3 2 Line Object Properties Description The dialog window for line objects has two tabs A General tab as was described above and a line tab containing information about the coordinates of the start and endpoints of a line object in the selected unit The coordinate values cannot be modified in this dialog window Line Object Properties LY Se General Line Start Point End Point X 5 X 113 538 mr Y 6 022 mm Y 2 dr _ Cancel 4 4 3 3 Domain Object Properties Description This is the dialog window for domain objects see Rectangular Domain tool Elliptical Domain tool and Polygon Domain tool on the model page which should not be confused with the result objects on the report page The domain object dialog window has two tabs a General tab as described above and a domain tab containing specific settings for domain objects Domain Object Properties Ea General Domain Vertices Boundary Conditions Total Vertices 4 Total Boundary Conditions BC1 p X 736 34 ject Symmetry Model sec y 13 4 n poner _ Cancel Fields Total Vertices 238 Number of corner points for the domain by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Vertices Total Boundary Con
173. el the import Skip Skipal Cancel Fields Skip Skips this entry and continues with the importing Cancels Cancels the import process Calculation Critical Material present In the Special Materials Options dialog window you have defined materials as critical which are visible in the construction Critical Materials Le A There are domains in the model with materials you assigned as critical By choosing gt Stop lt all domains with critical materials will be marked the calculation will stop and you can assign other materials to these domains By choosing gt Continue lt the calculation will be started with the crtitical materials Fields Stop The calculation is stopped and all domains with critical materials are highlighted By repeatedly clicking on the Zoom In button in the message line all 288 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows critical material domains will be highlighted in order to assign other materials to these domains These highlights will disappear in the next calculation Continue The calculation continues with the present values Calculation Radiation Properties In the file are cavity materials according to EN ISO 10077 2 that don t match with the option settings cf Option dialog window Emissivity Y ws There are cavities or glazing with surface emissivity epsilon values which differ from the
174. elines function is active then the mouse can only define points which are located on guidelines E g a moved object will automatically snap to a guideline You can set guidelines by either clicking on a ruler or by setting them in the Options dialog window which can be activated with the menu command Tools Options Id Snap to Object Toggles the object alignment of objects Ifthe Snap to Object function is active then the mouse defines points on other objects Moving an object near anode on another object will cause the object to snap to that node 4 2 5 1 Arrange Menu Submenu Order Th Bring to Front Positions the selected object to the very front of the same layer 2 Send to Back Positions the selected object to the very back ofthe same layer i To Front one Step Moves the selected object one position ahead in the same layer Li To Back one Step Moves the selected object one position back in the same layer O that the order of the objects is also influenced by the order of the layers 4 2 5 2 Arrange Menu Submenu Align l Left Positions all objects in such a manner that all the encompassing rectangles of the selected objects align themselves left of the first marked object S Right Positions all objects in such a manner that all the encompassing rectangles of the selected objects align themselves right of the first marked object by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 153 Refere
175. email addressed to infomind by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 247 Reference 4 4 5 2 Overwriting an old file Description If you save a file that has been generated with a previous version of flixo pro then the following warning will appear Save Le D The file gt C Program Files Infomind flixo T utorials tutoriall_1_DE flx lt was created with an older version of the application If you choose gt Save lt you can t open the file with an older version anymore Save As Cancel Figure 2 Save dialog window Save Overwrites the file with the most current file After the file has been saved in this way it can no longer be opened with an older version of flixo pro Save As Displays a standard file dialog window where you can enter anew name and directory path for the file Cancel Cancels the action 4 4 5 3 Batchsolver Description You have the option to calculate many files at once e g over night The files can be defined in a special dialog window 248 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Batch Calculations Files C Program File C Program File C Program File C Program File C Program File Mtutorial4_1_DE fl Autorial4_1_EN flx Atutorial4_2_DE flx tutorial4_ 2_ EN fle tutorial4_3_DE flx C Program Files C Program Files C Program F
176. ended Figure 1 Measure Distance tool properties by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 69 Reference 4 1 7 Zoom 70 Use Description In documents there are often several different objects that you would like to work on With the Zoom tool you can zoom in or zoom out to enlarge or reduce a visible area of an active document Besides the Zoom tool there is a whole list of commands which also function as zoom functions If the option Activate mouse wheel zoom in the Options dialog window see Application gt Tools gt General is activated the application window view can be changed by turning the mouse wheel independently of the active instrument How do activate it The Zoom tool can be activated by clicking on the icon in the Toolbox flyout For predefined Zoom operations there is the Zoom toolbar You can find the Zoom commands in the View menu or by using the commands from the context menus right click How do use it Zoom In The command can be found under View Zoom or can be activated by clicking on the a icon on the Zoom toolbar cf figure 1 The content of the window will be magnified by a factor of 2 Zoom out The command can be found under View Zoom or can be activated by clicking on the a icon on the Zoom toolbar cf figure 1 The content of the window will be halved Zoom The tool can be activated by clicking on the Q icon in the Toolbox flyout It allows you to
177. ents e Select the components that you would like to insert e Drag the component from either the list or from the preview window into the document Exporting and Importing Component File Lists With the Export command from the context menu right click of the component database you can export a list of user defined components as a comma separated value CSV file including all components as zipped file You can export the user defined components database a category or a component by right clicking on corresponding entry and using the Export command The selection of the exported components is defined by the mouse cursor position at the time the context menu is prompted Besides loading an existing boundary condition database or creating a new database cf Options you can complement the existing flixo procomponents database with data from specially structured text files To do this use the context menu command right click Import by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 171 Reference The data will either be inserted into the database or into a not write protected category The position for the insertion of the data depends on whether you right click on the database icon or on the category icon 4 3 6 Documents Flyout EIContent Description Searching Files Defining Start Directory Defining The Documents flyout allows the management searching and filtering of documents in a file directory
178. er 4 Show units Result 4 Show symbolic formula Show intermediate values Help Objects V Show help objects 4 Highlight reference point Heat flux Style Edit style Choose style U value style Edit style Choose style Dimension style Edit style Choose style Preview 9463 Wr ge DU SO DAS TED DS Cancel Fields General Tab Name Here you define the name of the style You cannot leave this field empty the chosen name must be unique i e not identical to another existing name Aside from these limitations you are free to choose any name Digits Number of decimal places or significant digits which are to be displayed The kind Decimal Points or Significant you can select using the adjacent drop down list Thousands delimiter The digits left ofthe decimal point will be grouped into thousands Show units The appropriate units will be shown after each numerical value The units can be adjusted in the Units tab ofthe Options dialog window Show symbolic formula Here you determine whether you want to display the symbolic formula for the result object Show intermediate values Here you determine whether you want to display the 198 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows intermediate formula used for the result object Psi value calculation Show help objects Here you determine whether help result objects
179. erstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Menu Commands 4 2 2 5 Edit Menu Submenu 3D equivalent Object Define Edit Dissolve Object Creates an equivalent 3D object from the selected objects either area weighted or according to prEN ISO 12631 The material kind and dimensions can be defined in the opening dialog window The use of 3D equivalent objects is explained in tutorial 8 Opens a dialog window where the material kind and dimensions of a 3D equivalent object can be adjusted according to EN 13947 Dissolves an existing 3D equivalent object 4 2 2 6 Edit Menu Submenu Graphic Object 4 2 3 Define Dissolve Object Defines a graphic object Graphic objects are not taken into account in the calculation they facilitate the legibility of the illustration Dissolves a graphic object and deletes all parametric information View Menu Draft Shows all objects in draft mode Only the outline of objects in the color of the layer on which they are located is shown Works together with Proof command Proof Shows all objects with all their graphical properties Works together with Draft command Zoom A submenu with commands to magnify and reduce the object on the screen gt Toolbox Shows the Toolbox flyout Ch Materials Shows the Materials flyout rj Boundary Conditions Shows the Boundary Conditions flyout A Layers Shows the Layers flyout Rz Styles Shows the Styles flyout H Components Shows
180. etermines if and which color should be used when there is a problem spot Settings that are used when importing and exporting SVG files MN vote that these settings must be set before you open or save a SVG file Options 71 8 Application General User Interface EE Save A Database Templates 1 Unit corresponds 1 Meter v Basic Units i 3 E mport a Dre Regions without Material Properties Data Exchange DXF Import Y Consider SYG Import Export Fill with Undefined Material Tools B Document Model Cavity Material Unventilated air cavity Special Materials Cavities Export meee 4 Export Physical Model esults u gt A 3 Current Page Mirror everything vertically Fields 1 Unit corresponds Consider Fill with Cavity Material If no other respective value has been defined in the imported file this default value is taken into account for non dimensional coordinate entries in Building SVG files If this option is marked all domain definitions without any material specifications will also be imported and assigned with the corresponding material If not they will be ignored Material name used for filling domains without any specific material properties If the material is not present in the document a new one will be created Cavity material name used for filling cavities in a domain like a tube If the material is not present in the document a new cavity material will be c
181. ettings are determined 214 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Options E Application General Save Database T emplates Basic Units Derived units Data Exchange B Document Model Special Materials Cavities Calculation Results Current Page User Interface Documents v Automatic backup each 5 4 Automatic save before calculation 7 Automatic save after calculation Tools Prompt for document properties before initial save min Fields Automatic backup Automatic save before calculation Automatic save after calculation Prompt for document properties before initial save 4 4 2 4 Database Templates Description This option allows to make automatic backup of all open files The files will be restored in case of a program crash Determines whether the current file will be saved before the model is calculated If the file has not yet been saved then a file dialog will appear where you can enter the file name and path Determines whether the current file will be saved after the model is calculated If the file has not yet been saved then a file dialog will appear where you can enter the file name and path Determines whether the Document Properties dialog window should automatically be activated before a document is saved for the first time In the Database Templates options dialog window you can determi
182. evious tool is active again e In the single use mode the k Select Move Scale tool is activated automatically after creating an object or finishing an action Tools with a single use mode setup can temporarily be put into the multiple use mode by double clicking on the corresponding symbol in the Tool flyout until another tool explicitly is activated The standard mode of a tool can be configured in the tool options compare the General Tools Options dialog window Tools overview Tools in this chapter KR Select Move Scale tool WhRotate tool l wt Assign Properties tool cut tool W Measure Distance tool e Zoom tool Rectangular Domain tool e Elliptical Domain tool olygon Domain too Polygon Domain tool e Air Cavity EN ISO 10077 2 Boundary Condition tool by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools Heat Source tool e T crop tool EResult Object tool of Temperature tool e f Min Max Temperature tool e Heat Flux Density tool e Heat Flux tool e HFU Value tool e Y psi Value tool TSpimension tool i Information tool Line tool Cpolyline tool e Rectangle tool e Ellipse tool e A Text tool 4 1 1 Select Move Scale Tool Use Description Generally it is necessary to select one or several objects before an action can be carried out To this end there is the Select Move Scale tool Furthermore this tool can also move and sca
183. ew layers and delete existing layers Move layers Change the order and thus the visibility of layers Edit layer properties Edit the Layer properties Add and delete result objects Create new result objects such as local temperatures heat flow etc and delete existing Move result objects Change the position of result objects Scale result objects Change the size of result objects Edit result objects Change the positions of the result object endpoints e g position of the label Edit result object properties Adjust the properties e g room humidity for condensation of the temperature object etc of a result object in the Properties Flyout or dialogue Assign a style to a result object Choose a different appearance for a result object Rename result objects Customize the name of a result object in by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 281 Reference the Properties Flyout The values of the named result objects can be displayed with a field function Add and delete general objects Create new general objects like line text or delete existing ones Move general objects Adjust the position of general objects Scale general objects Change the size of general objects Edit general objects Adjust the position of vertices of general objects Assign a style to a general object Select a different appearance for a general object OK Protects t
184. example all B C start points with that of other boundary condition properties The two boundary conditions can be defined in the corresponding dialog window 4 2 2 3 Edit Menu Submenu Parametric Object Define or Modify Defines a new parametric object and lets you modify existing parametric objects by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 147 Reference Dissolve Object New Parameter Edit Parameter Delete Parameter Delete All Parameters Finish Cancel Check Markers Toggle Markers Remove Markers Check all Markers Toggle All Markers Remove All Markers Dissolves an existing parametric object and deletes all the parameter information Saves the properties of the edge which was last adjusted and creates a new parametric edge after this edge has been selected Saves the properties of the edge which was last adjusted and either creates a new parametric edge or changes an existing parametric edge after this edge has been selected Removes the properties of the currently selected parametric edge Removes all the parameters from an object Ends the definition of parameters This command is only active when the current parametric edge is correctly defined i e exactly one corner of the edge must display a cross Ends the definition of parameters Cancels the parameter entry process for an object parameters entered for that section of the object are lost M
185. f another layer on the same page Aside from these restrictions you can choose any name Color Here you can determine the color of the objects in the Draft view Visible If this option is selected all the objects on the selected layer are visible Printable If this option is selected then all the objects on the selected layer will be 260 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows printed Editable If this option is selected then all the objects on the selected layer can be edited This option cannot be changed for System layers OK Applies the settings to the selected layers Cancel Cancels the entire action 4 4 5 17 Materials Description The dialog window Materials contains different fields to adjust the properties of a material This dialog window can be activated from the Materials flyout or the Domain Object properties dialog window Properties at 0 900 sa 0 900 Material ve Y Unventilated Name Me f m IM Type Figure 2 Air cavity properties Conductivity 2 160 000 Wi mK Isotropic Properties Zver 160 000 w mK Orthotropic a 0 837 sa 0 837 Additional p 2800 000 kg m Air N w 5 mal mbhPa klikgK 4 2 Figure 3 Gas properties Description according to EN ISO 10077 2 2003 a Gas Composition MA ar mg Cancel se o E Krypton 0 2 Figure 1 Material dialog window Figure 4 Gas composition properties by in
186. f the frame of the Psi value calculation matches exactly with the one of the Uf value calculation e Materials which define the frame dimensions on the Uf value calculation are not used in other parts than the frame e g aluminium If necessary you have to create duplicates of materials e g aluminium frame and aluminium panel 4 1 22 Dimension Tool Use Limitations Description The Dimension tool enables the display of measurements within Result objects You can chose between orthogonal dimension and distance of 2 points How do activate it The Dimension tool can be activated with the command Dimension in the menu Insert or by clicking on the fa icon in the Toolbox flyout Then select the kind Orthogonal or Coordinate I in the tool properties cf figure 1 When the tool is active the mouse becomes a 1 inthe area of the construction How do use it Three steps are required to measure a distance First click on the position where the measurement should begin and then on the spot where the measurement should end Next move the mouse outside of the construction the dashed lines represent a preview of the dimension lines With the third mouse click you define the definitive position of the dimension lines If you want to interrupt the line input process then you can use the context menu right click command Cancel or hit the ESC key With the Select Move Scale tool or Edit tool respectively you can change the positi
187. flixo pro Version 7 The thermal bridge analysis and reporting application by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch flixo pro by Infomind GmbH The thermal bridge analysis and reporting application is a tool to analyze the thermal properties of a design or construction and to document those results calculates and gives an overview of temperatures and heat flux densities it shows temperatures in specific places along with other global thermal properties by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Table of Contents Table of Contents Vorwort 0 Teil New 10 1 What s new in version Picnic aaa aaar aaa aaea araa a aa Saara Ae E E Eara raaa enreda ba 10 2 What s ANA cncedussvngzecer 11 3 Whats NEW IN VersiOnid ii dali 13 A What s new in Version 4 1 nmiicicininiaianic cercare a dat 14 Teil Il Use 16 1 User Interface iio ne eisernen 16 2 Program Structure ci e E dE sai 16 3 Workflow nee enge cfeneesweectativiemesteseceentenes 17 4 Defining the Construction uunsrsesnnssrnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnsnnnnn nennen nnannnnn 18 A TE T THE 19 6 Preparing a Repo vicio a ida e de 19 TOSCO is 20 Teil III Tutorials 24 1 Basic Techniques oia nd cad Defining Program and Document Settings ooocccccconcnanccncnonnnnancnnncnananananc cnn oran crac Entering Model Geometry cool A cies san anna aa een anne eh Defining
188. fomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 261 Reference 262 Material Database Select an entry from the database L Material Database 13 ENISO 12524 3 2 ENISO 10077 2 Frame 2 3 Cavities y Frame El Copper 1 E Aluminium Si alloys Brass 1 Steel 1 E Stainless steel 1 E Hardwood PYC polyvinylchloride rigid 2 Snftwand ftunical eanstruction timher T r m Figure 5 Materials database window Fields Name Color Hatch Type Here the name of the material can be defined You cannot leave this field empty and the chosen name must be unique i e it cannot be identical to the name of another material be it in an open document or be it in the application Aside from these restrictions you can choose any name After clicking on the button a dialog window appears with the materials database From the database you can choose an entry The properties of this material will be assumed Defines the color which along with the hatch characterizes the material in the construction In the Materials flyout a small square before the name of a material defines its color This color indicates the color of the material which will be used when entering materials for a construction You can assign materials to a domain with the Assign Properties tool or by dragging the desired material onto the domain Defines the hatch which along with the co
189. freely magnify and freely reduce an area of your choice When the tool is active the mouse becomes a 4 You can enlarge a specific spot within the drawing area by clicking on that spot that spot now becomes the focus of the work area If you move the mouse before releasing the mouse button you can define a rectangular area to be enlarged The content of this window will fill the application window Hold down the Ctrl key when you click on an area and the mouse will change to a Q and the area will be reduced In the context menu right click you will find other zoom commands that change the size of application window Zoom Percent Inthe menu View Zoom Percent there is a list of different sizes these can also be found in the context menu right click The desired zoom factor can be defined in the number field on the Standard toolbar cf figure 1 alternatively the slider at the bottom of the application window can be moved cf figure 2 Zoom to Selection The command can be found under View Zoom or can be activated by clicking on the HG icon on the Zoom toolbar cf figure 1 respectively at the bottom of the application window cf figure 2 The selected object will be magnified to fill the entire by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools application window Zoom to all Objects The command can be activated under View Zoom or can be activated by clicking on the a icon on the Zoom toolbar cf fi
190. groups and graphic objects 1 2 What s new in version 6 Below a selection of the new features and improvements of the flixo pro version 6 Model and Results Psi Value tool with plenty of new application possibilities an optimized visualization of the Psi value results with automatic measurements and display of the calculation formulas graphical representation of the reference point Psi Joint Value calculation according to EN 13947 Spacer or Edge Psi Value calculation according to EN ISO 10077 2 Psi Value calculation with 3 Constructions e g Psi value of a specific window wall junction Key values for the calculation of the Psi value can manually be adjusted in the Properties flyout the heat flux can be defined as a component key value e g for the Psi value calculation for base U Joint Value calculation according to EN 13947 Equivalent U Value with formulas and help objects comparable to the frame U value The frame dimension calculation for the Frame U Value and Joint U Value can be based on the projection of the colder or the warmer side or on the bigger of the two sides For Frame U Value and Joint U Value objects the reference points for determining the frame dimension can be moved by the Select Move Scale tool Linear shaped heat sources or sinks Screws according to EN 13947 new 3 dimensional equivalent object with an automatic calculation of the equivalent conductance and air cavities the 3 dimensional equivalent object
191. gure 1 respectively at the bottom of the application window cf figure 2 All objects will be displayed at maximum magnification If the option Activate mouse wheel zoom in the Option dialog window cf Application gt Tools gt General is activated then the same command can be activated by double clicking the mouse wheel Zoom to Material The command can be activated under View Zoom or by clicking on the a icon located on the Zoom toolbar respectively at the bottom of the application window cf figure 2 The next object defined with material selected from the Materials flyout will be magnified to fill the application window Zoom to Conflict The command can be activated under View Zoom or by clicking on the 4 icon on the Zoom toolbar cf figure 1 The function is available in case of problems arised during DXF import or in the preparation steps for the calculation After a DXF conversion it allows you to find unclosed edges and after the start of a calculation it allows you to find critical materials see tutorial 3 and tutorial 5 Alternatively in case of problems a message bar is shown Within this message bar you can click on the Zoom button for enlarging the conflict area e g if not all boundary conditions are defined cf figure 3 ES Model Not all BCs are defined It s not possible to generate the mesh Zoom In Zoom Out Calculate Figure 3 Message Bar Zoom Page This command can be activated by clicking on the 2 icon on
192. gure 2 Cut tool properties O e Only those domains which are separated into at least two parts can be cut Depending on the setting of Only selected objects cf figure 2 all domains or only the selected ones will be cut 68 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools Measure Distance Use Description The Measure Distance tool allows you to measure the distance between two points How do activate it The measure distance tool can be activated with the command Measure Distance in the menu Tools or by clicking on the icon in the Toolbox flyout When the tool is active the mouse becomesa How do I use it After entering the coordinates of two points the distance as well as the horizontal and vertical projection will appear in the measure distance tool properties see figure 1 Mouse Click on two points in the construction you wish to measure After the second click the distance will be measured If you want to cancel the entry before the endpoint is defined choose the command Cancel from the context menu right click or hit the ESC key Keyboard Enter the coordinates of the two points in the following fields x1 y1 as well as x2 y2 see figure 1 You can jump to the next entry fields by hitting the Tab key Position 1 793 242 mm yl 445 262 mm 2 737 870 mm y2 404 114 mm Cancel Properties Distance 68 987 mm hor 55 372 mm ver 41 148 mm Ext
193. h are to be shown The digits left of the decimal point will be grouped into thousands The appropriate units will be shown after each numerical value The units can be adjusted in the Units tab of the Options dialog window The calculation of all other regular isotherms is based on this temperature That means that all regular isotherms along with the defined isotherm separation distance are defined based on this temperature This temperature determines at what point flixo pro displays isotherms The first temperature is displayed by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Temperature step Regular Line Highlighted Isotherms Highlighted Line Special Tab Temperatures Art Style and then all others are shown at the Highlighted Line period With this setting you can define the isotherm temperature difference distance of two regular isotherms Changing the isotherm separation distance affects all of the regular isotherms of the result object which use this style This setting group determines the properties of regular isotherm lines color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm To make isotherm lines more legible you can highlight every n th isotherm by determining special properties The specific settings of the highlighted isotherms color style thickness are set in the Highlighted Line
194. he document selectively against changes of certain adjustments list properties Actions which are selected in the list may be adapted by users Add an remove models Add new model pages and delete existing ones Add an remove master reports Add new templates and delete existing ones Add an remove reports Add new reports and delete existing ones Add an remove materials Add new materials and delete existing ones Edit material properties Change material properties Edit material representation Change appearance related properties e g color of materials Add and remove boundary conditions Add new boundary conditions and delete existing ones Edit boundary condition properties Change boundary condition properties Edit boundary condition representation Change appearance related properties e g color of boundary conditions Add and remove styles Add new styles appearance related properties of result objects such as the number of decimal places and delete existing ones Edit styles Change style properties Edit calculation options Change Calculation options Edit model options Change Model options Edit cavity options Change Cavity options Edit special material options Change Special material options Edit result options Change Result options OK Protects the document selectively against changes of certain properties Actions which are selected in the list may be ada
195. he report selectively against changes of certain properties Actions which are selected in the list may be adapted by users If a password has been defined then a dialog window will appear prompting for a password Cancel Cancels the entire action The report is not protected 4 4 5 32 Protect Document Description In this dialog window you can protect certain document properties from being revised or allow certain adjustments to documents It is possible to protect the document without a password If you have defined a password a separate dialog window appears to enter the protection password Protect the document Y 23 Password Bis Password for unprotecting the object Please reenter the password and take note of it Caution If you lose or forget a password it cannot be recovered It ze is advisable to keep a list of passwords and their Allow all users to Y Add and remove models a Add and remove master reports 9 Add and remove reports Add and remove materials Edit material properties V Edit material representation Add and remove boundary conditions m Fl Edit boundary condition properties Y Edit boundary condition representation V Add and remove stules OK Cancel 282 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Fields Password You can enter a password or leave the field blank Allowed Protects t
196. his tutorial explains the presentation of document templates Document templates allow you to define the appearance and characteristics of the document generated from a template For example if you need your logo to appear on the report page it would be best to create a template In this tutorial you will create a report page template similar to the one illustrated below 48 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Document Templates Figure 1 End result of the template format Content Master Report page Creating a Standard Report Page Setting Standard Properties Saving the Document Template Creating Template Based Documents 3 6 1 Master Report Page All elements which are present on a report page e g logo author guidelines page number file name etc will be added to the Master Report page These elements can be hidden on any given page by clicking on the page and by editing the entry Ref on the reference layer see Layers tab Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 6 Summary by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 49 Tutorials e Anew document template is generated by creating a new document cf File New and then saving this document as a template cf Saving the document template e Elements which should appear on all report pages are inserted into the Master Report page and can only be edited in th
197. ial radiation properties assigning table using the Cavitiy EN ISO 10077 2 tool X e if you define the resulting radiation properties in heat flux direction by yourself then you have to define them directly in the Material dialog window O continue the tutorial you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top 3 4 4 Material Wizard According to EN ISO 10077 2 air cavities which have reductions smaller than 2 mm are allowed to be divided into smaller air cavities This segmentation which can greatly influence the results is done completely automatically by flixo pro if the option is selected in the Cavities Options dialog window This must be done before the calculation see figure 4 The options dialog window can be activated with the menu command Tools Options or by clicking on the E icon on the standard toolbar Options Y es Application Document Model q Standard EN ISO 10077 2 Special Materials Cavities Version EN ISO 10077 2 2012 X Cakar Calculate emissivities Results i Current Page Anisotropic conductivities ys Marker color Divisions Automatic division ME V Ignore existing divisions OK Cancel Figure 4 As soon as you are working with smaller domains in a construction you may run the risk of missing smaller domains which will not have any materials assigned and therefore could falsify the results of the calculation flixO pro has a
198. ich is defined in the layer material mapping table is assigned automatically to all closed objects e g polylines lying on the DXF layer Selected material The selected material from the Material list is assigned to all objects The automatic material assignment is explained in tutorial 3 Opens a file dialog window where you can select the file from which you want to inherit the existing DXF layer material mapping table Materials not not existing in the file materials will be inserted automatically into the material list Inherits all data and closes the dialog window Cancels the whole action The data are not changed by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 275 Reference 4 4 5 26 3D equivalen Description t Object In this dialog window you define the properties of periodically appearing 3 dimensional objects according to prEN ISO 12631 The definition and use of a screw as an example of a 3 dimensional object is explained in detail in tutorial 8 amp Consider that applying an equivalent 3 dimensional object is only an approximation of a 3 dimensional calculation and doesn t replace it for critical cases 3D Equivalent Object ca x Material Type Dimensions Diameter Distance Stainless steel austenitic or austeniti m Rectangular Section z 6 000 Millimeter 300 000 OK Cancel Felder Materi
199. ile entering the model geometry you can undo an action if needed like other actions as well by clicking on the 3 icon in the standard toolbar by using the menu command Edit Undo or by using the shortcut Ctrl Z Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 1 Summary by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 27 Tutorials 3 1 3 28 While entering a Rectangular Domain O with the keyboard the x y coordinates correspond to the reference point The position of the reference point is defined with the reference point button position of the red square Objects can also be copied with the mouse by activating the Select Move Scale tool Ly and by holding the Ctrl key down while moving the object First release the mouse button and then the Ctrl key e While moving or copying objects with the mouse the reference point is used to Snap to object Snap to Grid Snap to Guidelines While selecting the reference point symbolizes the closest corner and is shown as a small circle While adjusting the size of an object with the keyboard see Select Move Scale tool k the reference point determines which is not moved in the adjustment e The order and the visibility of the objects are taken into account in the calculation The order of the selected domain can be adjusted with the commands in the Arrange menu A rectangular domain is defined with two mouse clicks of
200. iles C Program Files C Program Files C Program Files C Program Files C Program Files C Program Files C Program Files C Program Files C Program Files tutoriall _3_DE flx C Program Files Mtutoriall_4_DE flx C Program Files tutorial2_1_DE flx Atutorial2_1_EN flo tutorial2_2_DE flx C Program Files Atutorial2_3_DE flx Atutorial2_3_EN fls Atutorial2_4_DE flx tutoriall_1_DE flx tutoriall_1_EN flx tutoriall_2_DE fly tutoriall_2 EN flx tutoriall_3_EN flx tutoriall_4_ EN flx Mutorial2_2_EN flx m m Add Open Files Add Remove Start Cancel Fields Files List of all files that are to be calculated Add Open Files Adds all the open flixo pro document files to the list for calculation Add Opens the standard Open dialog window where you can select one or more files to calculate Remove Removes the selected files from the file calculation list Start Begins the calculation of all files located on the file list Cancel Cancels the action 4 4 5 4 Update Database Description You can periodically update database maintained by infomind or third party by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 249 Reference Update Databases X Material Database a O EN ISO 10456 O EN ISO 10077 2 O EN ISO 673 O EN ISO 6946
201. ill be taken into account while printing E Shows whether the layer can be edited Determines the color of the objects when the draft mode is active To activate or deactivate a property you can either click on the corresponding icon use the commands from the context menu right click of the layers Visible Printable Editable or open the Layer dialog window by selecting the layer and clicking on the El icon in the flyout Alternatively you can use the menu command Edit Not only can the properties of a layer be changed but also the name and the color of a layer can be adjusted Choose the context menu command Rename or repeatedly click on the layer name as you would to rename a file under Windows Explorer System layers cannot be renamed The order of the layers in the list determines the visibility of the objects Objects which are positioned on the upper layers cover the objects located on the lower layers The order of the layers can be changed by dragging the layers into the desired order Thus it is possible to always position the guidelines as the first layer so that they will never be obscured by other objects The order of the layers can also be defined with the order icons Ta Y 4 Hi located in the flyout System Layers On each page of a document there are two layers which cannot be renamed or deleted These two layers are the Guidelines and the Grid layers Naturally the guidelines can be found on the guidelines layer an
202. in the Properties flyout All heat fluxes will be calculated counterclockwise from start to endpoint To calculate the heat flux all reference points will automatically be shown at the nearest mesh point on the surface The sign of the heat flux is taken into account heat fluxes into the system are positive heat fluxes out of the system are negative If there are more than 2 boundary condition temperatures in the model then the P value depends on the temperature relations and is not valid for other boundary condition temperatures The rule for the calculation of the needed temperature difference must be defined in the Properties flyout by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 125 Reference O e This tool can only be used on the report page and only if result objects of a previously calculated model are present e Neither interior edges nor heat sources can be present 4 1 21 2 3 Constructions 126 Use Physics Limitations Description With the Psi Value tool kind 3 Constructions you can calculate Y values of constructions which have 3 connected constructions The 2 thermal junctions are either identical both Y values are equal or one connection is free of thermal bridges one Y value of one connection is zero Typical applications are spacer Y values for mullion constructions or the Y value of a window wall junction if the glazing of the window is replaced by a panel according to E
203. in which the imported file is selected can either be activated with the menu command File Import or by clicking on the icon e The DXF import properties are determined in a special Options dialog window that in certain cases have to be adjusted before the importing process begins They will be used for the transformation of corner coordinates and the approximation of circles and arcs with polylines The dialog window can either be activated directly from the Import dialog window or with the menu command Tools Options 34 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch DXF Import O continue the tutorial you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top 3 3 2 Selection of to be imported Layers Material Assignment Often not all of the data in a DXF file is needed for the analysis e g hatch axis In Flixo pro you can choose to maintain certain elements while importing which are found on different layers The layer visibility determines which elements on certain layers are to be imported Optionally you can assign a material to the domains based on the layer information of the imported polylines Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 3 Summary e Layers which are not to be used in the import can be hidden in the Layers flyout A by deactivating the visibility option in the column e To facilitate the legibility the layer color can optionally be changed
204. ind ch 195 Reference Fields General Tab Name Digits Thousands delimiter Show units Show symbolic formula Show intermediate values Show help objects Heat flux style U value style 196 Here you define the name of the style You cannot leave this field empty the chosen name must be unique i e not identical to another existing name Aside from these limitations you are free to choose any name Number of decimal places or significant digits which are to be displayed The kind Decimal Points or Significant you can select using the adjacent drop down list The digits left of the decimal point will be grouped into thousands The appropriate units will be shown after each numerical value The units can be adjusted in the Units tab of the Options dialog window Here you determine whether you want to display the symbolic formula for the result object Here you determine whether you want to display the intermediate formula used for the result object U value calculation Here you determine whether help result objects dimension U value and heat flux objects should be automatically added or not By clicking on the Edit Style button a dialog window will appear where you can adjust the style of the heat flux help object By clicking on the Choose Style button a dialog window will appear where you can choose and apply a heat flux style The current settings of the selected style will
205. ing Materials 161 Extended selection mode 222 Exterior Boundaries 80 Exterior Edge 293 O e Field function 243 Field functions 270 Fields Number of Pages 270 File Calculate 145 File Name 270 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch File Properties 242 File Properties Dialog 242 Find Conflict Areas 150 Flixo online 157 Flixo Updates 157 Flyout Boundary Conditions 164 Components 168 Context Help 175 Documents 172 Layers 159 Materials 161 Styles 167 Toolbox 173 Flyout Window Arrange 158 Auto Hide 158 Dockable 158 Floating 158 Move 158 Overview 158 Focus layer 159 Formate 176 Frame 113 Frame U Value 109 252 Frame U Value Properties 240 Frame U Value Style Properties 195 Free Zoom 70 fRSI Value 90 Ss Gas composition dialog window 261 Gas Material 261 General Approach 17 Generation of the element grid 231 Glass Unit 286 Graphic Object 145 Define 149 Dissolve Object 149 Graphic Objects 293 Grid 293 Grid settings 234 Gridwidth 218 Group 152 Grouping Boundary Conditions into Categories 164 Grouping Materials into Categories 161 Guidelines 49 293 Add 235 301 flixo 7 Help Guidelines 49 293 define 32 Delete 235 Move 235 H Heat Flux Density 96 Heat Flux density legend style Properties 201 Heat Flux Density Style Properties 188 Heat Flux Density Tool 96 Heat Flux Style Properties 189 Heat Flux Tool 98 Heat Sink 81 Heat Source 81 Heat transfer
206. irichlet Surface temperature for Dirichlet BC or Cauchy BC or air Clima temperature for Climate BC and window frame BC h Heat transfer coefficient The heat transfer resistance R can optionally be entered at this point as well The settings can be determined in the Options dialog window E Emissivity between 0 and 1 Description Additional commentary The values must be entered in the displayed units You can change the display in the Basic Units Options dialog window 4 4 5 19 Air Cavity Material 266 Description The Air Cavity dialog window is activated exclusively when the Air Cavity EN ISO 10077 2 tool is prompted Air Cavity Material X There is no air cavity material with the name Unventilated air cavity Eps 0 9 in this file Properties al 0 900 za 0 900 Unventilated Description Unventilated air cavities according to prEN 10077 2 Fields Name The name of the material is determined here The field cannot be left empty and the selected name must be unique You can either select an existing air cavity material of the correct type or you can create a new material with values entered into this dialog window Color The material will be symbolized by this color and hatch in the construction by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows You can only adjust the color if this is a new air cavity material Hatch The material will be symbolized b
207. is page Guidelines can be created in the Guidelines dialog window or by clicking within the rulers encompassing the application window Marked guidelines can be adjusted either in the tool properties of the Select Move Scale tool r or using the keyboard in the Properties flyout e A new layer can be created in the Layers flyout A New elements are always added to the Focus layer e You can insert pictures and field functions Field functions are place holders which display results after they have been generated The type and properties of the field functions can be determined in a dialog window Objects can proportionately be reduced or enlarged with the Select Move Scale tool IX while the Shift key is held down Selected objects can be moved with the arrow keys e New fonts can be created in the Styles flyout Kr O continue the tutorial you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top 3 6 2 Creating a Standard Report Page The presentation of the results output such as isotherms streamlines used materials which influence the whole object can be determined with the help of predefined result object properties defined in the different report pages of the template Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 6 Summary e Report pages can be renamed by double clicking on the corresponding tab at the bottom of the application window or by selecting the corresponding command from the
208. is tutorial the application and the generation of a parametric object in flixo pro is explained with the example of a glass unit Parametric objects can be useful in two situations First they allow the generation of generic construction elements and components e g spacer generic walls which can have other dimensions in a concrete situation Second they can rapidly generate versions of an existing result whereby a specific dimension is changed and all layers and elements are moved correspondingly Content Applying Parametric Objects Defining a Parameteric Object 3 7 1 Applying Parametric Objects At the time of shipment several components in flixO pro are parametric objects generic walls spacers etc which can be inserted into a document with the Drag amp Drop function Glass units and layer objects which can be generated with help of a dialog window are also parametric objects In the following steps we will generate a glass unit and insert an existing spacer Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 7 Summary e Glass units with a known U value are defined with the menu command Insert Glass Unit in the Glass Unit dialog window and are then inserted e Components from the Components flyout preview window are inserted into the document with the Drag amp Drop function e The length of parametric objects can be adjusted with the Select Move Scale tool Either the mouse or the keyboa
209. ities 229 Document Template 255 Document name 49 Guidelines 49 Insert field functions 49 Insertlogo 49 Isotherms 50 Master Report Page 49 new document 52 Often used materials 51 Options 51 Page numbers 49 Result object place holder 50 save 51 Streamlines 50 Template based document 52 Document Templates 48 Documents Search 172 Draft 149 Draft Mode 293 Drag amp Drop 293 Duplication of a material 161 DXF file import 34 open 34 DXF Files 143 DXF Import 33 Close lines 35 Close regions 36 Conflict 36 Convert data 36 Delete edges 35 Hide layers 35 Inaccurate illustration 36 Insert lines 36 Problem spots 36 DXF Import Settings 218 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Index E Ebene Properties 159 Edge 46 Edge Psi Value 46 Edit 59 62 Edit and Selection tool 222 Edit corners 59 Edit Layer Object 145 Element angle 222 Ellipse Tool 141 Elliptical Domain Tool Centric Creation 73 Circle 73 Keyboard 73 Emmissivities of cavities 229 EN ISO 10211 231 EN ISO 673 Norm Materials 251 Energy Loss 44 equivalent 3D Object 276 Equivalent U Value 47 Equivalent U Value Definition 107 Equivalent U Value Style 195 Equivalent U Value Tool 105 ESC Key 293 Example 37 Exit 143 Exit File 143 Export 143 Exporting 278 Graphic Files 143 SVG Files 143 Exporting and Importing Boundary Conditions 164 Exporting and Importing Component File Lists 168 Exporting and Import
210. ively 3 Constructions for mullion or transom Using these tools you have to enter the frame U value manually in the Properties flyout With the Select Move Scale tool or Edit tool respectively you can change the text positions of the help objects of the U values of the base construction and the dimensions distance You can adjust afterwards the file with the Uf value calculation in the Properties flyout cf file 1 If the Psi value couldn t get calculated you can see the according error message in the Properties flyout cf figure 1 see Psi value entry as well 132 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools ae 2 la Name Style 4 Psi Value Wim 4 Frame Uf Value Type 4 Frame Materia Polyarnid 6 Aluminium EPDM ethy Illen Elastomeric Soda lime g Polysulfid Butyl Isobu Hart Polyvi Nichtrosten Silicagel Tr x mm y mrm Width mm Height mm Figure 1 Properties flyout for the spacer Y value object Defining Styles The presentation of a Psi value object can be defined in the Style list in the Psi Value tool properties see figure 2 The list shows all styles for Psi value objects that have previously Psi Value extended 0 04437 File with Uf Valu C Program Files Infd 1 75531 Automatic 4 Frame Width Cal Max of projections 23 000 133 113 174 000 96 001 been determined in the Styles flyout A new Psi value object is
211. jects Show room temperatures Cancel Fields Show materials Show boundary conditions Show Surface Properties Show material borders Show labels Show Graphic Objects Show room temperatures Determines whether the materials of a result object should be displayed by default Determines whether the boundary conditions of a result object should be displayed by default Determines whether the radiation conditions of a cavity surface should be displayed by default Radiation conditions are only displayed ifthey are calculated automatically by flixo pro cf options Cavities Determines whether the material boundaries of a result object should be displayed by default Determines whether the point labels of individual result objects should be displayed by default Determines whether the graphic objects of a result object should be displayed by default Graphic objects facilitate the legibility of the results but are not considered in the calculation Determines whether the room temperatures of a result object should be displayed by default The room temperatures are indicated in the colors ofthe temperature field in the result domain by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 225 Reference 4 4 2 11 Cavity Wizard Description These settings determine the standard properties of the Cavity Wizard Options Y xs B Application a General User Interface Save
212. k There are two drop down lists that show the different possibilities This style is used when you are working with the Temperature tool The temperature style by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 179 Reference dialog window consists of a label line a text field and additional properties for surface points Temperature Style Y xs Temperature Style WA General Extended Font General Extended Font Name Temperatures Swen Properties ties Temperature ee Y FRSi Value Em Y Surface humidity _ Thousands delimiter 4 Room humitidy for condensation V Show units MIR humidity f A 2 Show result symbols BEI Room humidity for moisture Indicator Line Weight 0 200 Millimeter y Type End Point Markers Begin X Preview Preview 8 20 02 C 8 20 0 C OK Cancel ok Cancel Fields General Tab Name Here you define the name of the temperature style You cannot leave this field empty the chosen name must be unique i e the name cannot be identical to another existing name Aside from these limitations you are free to choose any name Digits Number of decimal places or significant digits which Thousands delimiter Show units 180 are to be displayed The kind Decimal Points or Significant you can select using the adjacent drop down list The digits left of the decimal point
213. l Type Type of boundary condition The following types of boundary conditions are supported Temperature h value For boundaries where the air temperature and the heat transfer coefficient are present This type of boundary condition is used for normal boundary conditions Temperature Dirichlet For boundaries where the surface temperature is given e g the entering temperature for a floor heating system Heat Flux Density Neumann For boundaries where the heat flux density for a surface is given Heat Flux Density Temperature Cauchy For boundaries where the heat flux density and the surface temperature are given Source Sink For the performance of linear sources and sinks see Heat Source Tool Radiation For the definition of surface radiation properties emissivities of air cavities if the surface properties are calculated by flixo pro cf Option dialog window cavities Window Frame For interior boundaries when calculating the frame U value according to EN ISO 10077 2 cf tutorial 4 The line properties the name of the 2 dependent boundary conditions for normal domains and the domains with reduced h values can be adjusted by clicking on the Boundaries button and entering the values in the dialog window see Figure 4 that appears q Neumann Heat stream density on the surface Cauchy by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 265 Reference 9 Cauchy D
214. l 145 Start 19 Calculate Uf Value 155 240 252 Calculate UTJ Value 252 Calculation start 31 Calculation of several files 248 Calculation of temperature dependent conductivity values 231 Calculation parameters 231 Calculation progress 268 Capture 223 Capture guidelines 31 Cartesian Coordinates 75 Category 270 Cauchy 264 Cavities Automatic division 229 Ignore existing divisions 229 Select standard version 229 Cavity Wizard 39 Change basic units 26 Change Template 143 Changing and Deleting a Style 167 Circle and polygon approximation 218 Close all documents 157 Close start page after file load 211 Closing a File 143 Color gradient Heat Flow Density Field 233 Settings 233 Temperature Field 233 Comments 270 Company 270 Components by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Index Components Create 31 33 168 Delete 168 Edit 168 Search 168 use 31 32 Condensation Risk 87 Condensation Zone 91 Conflict area 42 Constrain angle 222 Construction entry 18 Content 157 Context Help Flyout 175 Coordiante origin adjust 32 Coordinate origin 20 adjust 26 32 Coordinate system 20 Copy 59 145 Copyastyle 167 Copying Boundary Conditions 164 Create air cavities automatically 77 Create Ellipse 141 Create Line 138 Create Material Domain Elliptical Domain 73 Polygon Domain 75 Create New 75 Boundary Conditions 80 Dimension 135 Ellipse 141 Elliptical Domain 73 Equivalent U Value Obje
215. lated The following relations are valid Ueq A B exterior Ueq A B C A B D interior and Ueq A B interior Ueq A B C A B D exterior e In case the heat flux through the section surface exceeds a critical relatively high value then an appropriate warning will be shown You can adjust these borders in the Properties flyout cf figure 4 e The heat fluxes will be calculated counterclockwise from start to endpoint e To calculate the heat flux all reference points will automatically be shown at the nearest mesh point on the surface e The sign of the heat flux is taken into account heat fluxes into the system are positive heat fluxes out of the system are negative Properties 4x EE Selected Object Name Style U Value extended Results U Value W m2 K 1 1882 Calculation Consider heat flux th Show alert Y Limit 5 Dimension Reference Point x mm y mm Width mm Height mm 88 201 Figure 4 Properties flyout of a equivalent U value object O e This tool can only be used on the report page and only if result objects of a previously calculated model are present e The temperature differences must have the same values for both sections 108 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools e Only 2 boundary condition temperatures can be present in the model e Neither interior borders nor heat sources can be present 4
216. lated or not ventilated According to EN 10077 2 air cavities are unventilated when they are completely surrounded by material with exterior exposure of less than 2mm According to EN 10077 2 air cavities are ventilated when they have exposure greater or equal to 2mm but less than 10mm If the air cavity is greater than this value then a boundary condition must be set and the air cavity cannot be assigned a material This option can only be selected for air cavities A small drop down list with the supported gas types air argon SF6 krypton or gas composite If you choose Gas composite then the mixture can be changed by clicking on the gt button A small dialog window will appear where you alter the mixture s composition The sum of all components must equal 100 The type of gas must only be defined for glass unit gases by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 263 Reference Description Density of the material The ratio of the vapor conductivity of the air to the vapor conductivity of a material Vapor conductivity of the material Specific heat capacity of the material Additional commentary These values are not needed by flixo pro calculations 4 4 5 18 Boundary Conditions Description The Boundary Condition dialog window contains several fields to define or adjust boundary conditions This dialog can be activated from the Boundary Conditions flyout
217. lation you will check the critical material key values of the cavities Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 8 Summary e Select all objects of the screw with the Select Move Scale tool By pressing the Shift key the selection is extended continuously with every further mouse click e Periodically appearing screws or objects with rectangular shaped cross section can be defined with the command Edit 3D equivalent Object gt Define You can adjust the material the kind screw or rectangular cross section and geometry materials radius and distance respectively depth and distance which are necessary for the calculation of the equivalent conductivities in the opening dialog window e The material of the background regions can also be assigned afterwards with the Drag amp Drop function the material of the equivalent 3 dimensional object can be by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Screw according to EN 13947 adapted in the Properties flyout or in the corresponding dialog window e Hidden lines subdivide the screws respectively the object with rectangular shaped cross section into regions The cavities which border to the screw form one single air cavity for which the equivalent key values are calculated according to EN ISO 10077 2 The subdivision of the screw into several parts has an essential influence on the results In our example the joint U value enlarges for 0 1 W m
218. le to the x axis in the field denoted by a w and the distance radius from the origin in the field marked with anr Click on the Next button in order to enter the coordinates of the next point The subsequent points can also be entered with relative coordinates e relative cartesian You enter the horizontal dx and vertical dy distance from the previous point e relative polar You enter the angle to the x axis and the distance radius from the previous point The Create button closes the domain while the Previous button deletes the previous point Defining Materials A new domain will always be created with the material which is currently selected in the Materials table or the material drop down list respectively You can change the material of a domain you would like to create by either changing the material in the Materials table or by choosing the material from the materials drop down list Polycarbonates 1 y properties in the tool You can also change the material of the domain afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 Position x 912 876 mm y 284 226 mm Create Cancel Properties Input Absolute Relative Coordinates O Cartesian Polar Materi Polycarbonates 1 v le Extended Figure 1 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools OD ication e The domain must have
219. le menu All reports and settings will replaced by the selected template Creation of a new document template is explained in further detail in tutorial 6 Assign Template Information to Copy Reports Materials Document Options Model v Special Materials Cavities Y Calculation Y Results 2s Adapt Template infomind flixo 7 0 ternplates Normal_EN flt ka Name current Name new z M Undefined Material Undefined Material M Polyamid 6 6 with 25 glassfibre Undefined Material Aluminium Si alloys Undefined Material M EPDM ethylene propylene diene mo Undefined Material E Ei Genk BETS J M Panel Undefined Material MW Ilen Undefined Material M Elastomeric foam Undefined Material M Unwentilated air cavity Unventilated air cavity ca Cliath rabiar aie u A ie aai ih i ES Desel all OK Cancel OK Cancel Figure 2 Selection of templates and Figure 3 Replacement of materials and boundary options Fields Template Reports Materials Boundary Conditions 256 conditions Here you set the file name and path of the template which newly serves as the basis of the document Click on the button to open a dialog window in which you can select the template If you choose this option all reports of the document are replaced by those of the document template If you choose this option all materials selected in a dialog window of the document are replaced by
220. le objects If the Select Move Scale tool is merged with the Edit tool cf Options dialog Tools General this tool lets you move corners add new corners or remove existing ones as well the edge lengths of parametric objects can get adjusted by this tool too How do activate it The Select Move Scale tool can be activated with the command Select Move Scale from the menu Tools or by clicking on the k icon in the Toolbox flyout When the tool is active the mouse takes the shape of an arrow or a symbol of an action which potentially could be executed How do use it Mouse The use of this tool is similar to the mouse control in Windows Explorer To select an object just click on it The outlines of the selected object are highlighted with a particular line cf the corresponding option in the Options dialog window category Application gt User Interface by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 59 Reference 60 This means that the object is active To mark several objects hold down the Shift key then click on the next object It is also possible to select several objects at the same time by clicking on a point which does not belong to an object or by holding down the Alt key and then drawing a rectangle All objects which are entirely in this designated area will be marked In the expanded selection mode cf Options dialog window category Application gt Tools gt General whereby if the
221. lick on one of the highlighted points and then move it you should keep the mouse button held down You can then see how the object gets bigger or smaller If you hold down the Shift key while scaling then the scaling is done proportionally that is the vertical increase or decrease matches that of the horizontal Corners Edge length If the Select Move Scale tool is merged with the Edit tool cf Options dialog Tools General you can modify also corner points and edge lengths otherwise this has to be done using the Edit tool Click on the corner point that you would like to move The point which is now highlighted in black see figure 1 can be moved by clicking on it and moving the point To delete a corner point choose the command Remove Vertex from the context menu as you right click on the particular vertex To add a new corner point click on the spot on the line where you want to insert the vertex A small circle now marks the spot see figure 2 Now choose the command Split Edge from the context menu right click in order to add the new corner point by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools Figure 1 Figure 2 Keyboard You can also numerically adjust the position the size and the scale of one or more than one object Make sure that the object is selected and the tool properties are visible see figure 3 If this is not the case you activate the Toolbox flyout and th
222. list shows all styles for Psi value objects that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new Psi value object will always be created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles flyout or in the Style drop down list in the Psi Value tool properties The styles can be also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 The type of label e g places after decimal point display of formula as well as the graphical properties of the cross section line can be adjusted with the corresponding styles in the Styles flyout 128 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools Properties Type 3 Constructions Style Psi Value extended 2 Figure 2 Tool properties A Results To receive accurate results the following conditions must be met e the cross section line should be defined within sections through which no heat flux flows e g symmetrical axes or on edges where there the boundary condition is set at heat flux density q 0 0 W m2K e lfyou choose an exterior reference system start and end points should lie on the exterior boundary of the construction If you choose an interior reference system start and end points should lie on the interior boundary of the construction Make note of the order of the in
223. ll Objects Guidelines Groups Material Domains Boundary Conditions Radiation Properties Parametric Objects Results Dimensions Text Graphical Objects Selects all objects in the current window Selects all not grouped guidelines in the current window Selects all groups in the current window Selects all not grouped material domains in the current window Selects all not grouped boundary condition objects in the current window Selects all not grouped radiation property objects in the current window Selects all not grouped parametric objects layered objects and glass units in the current window Selects all not grouped results like Temperature objects Heat Flux objects etc in the current window Selects all not grouped dimension objects in the current window Selects all not grouped text objects in the current window Selects all not grouped graphical objects like lines pictures field functions etc in the current window 4 2 2 2 Edit Menu Submenu Adjust Size Material Boundary Condition Changes the size of the entire construction depending on the modified size of a selected object The new size of the selected elements can be entered in the corresponding dialog window Replaces the material properties of one defined material with that of another The two materials can be defined in the corresponding dialog window Replaces the boundary condition properties of for
224. ll gt Cancel Match whole word only Match case Order Sort by Name Ascending D Descending Fields Name Category Match whole word only Match case Sort by Ascending Descending Enter the name or partial name of a material you would like to find Place holders are not supported here Here you define which categories you want to search in Filter only returns materials whose names match the exact Name Materials which have identical names with at least one other domain will not be returned Enables case sensitive search criteria Search results can be sorted by Name Thermal Conductivity Density or Specific Heat Capacity The filter results will be arranged in ascending order alphabetical or numerical The filter results will be arranged in descending order alphabetical or numerical by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 273 Reference 4 4 5 24 4 4 5 25 274 Document Search Description In this dialog window you can define the filter criteria Components v X da Name Window K vi Match whole word only Match case Order Sort by Name Ascending Descending Fields Name Category Match whole word only Match case Sort by Ascending Descending Layer Material Assignment Description Here you determine for which partial name you want to search Place holders are not support
225. lor characterizes the material in the construction There are three different types of materials Standard for materials that do not have a temperature dependent thermal conductivity Air cavity for small air cavities according to EN 10077 2 The equivalent thermal conductivities are calculated iteratively according to EN 10077 2 The precision and the maximum number of iterations can be defined on the corresponding page of the by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Isotropic Orthotropic Ahor Aver e1 2 unventilated Gas Type Options dialog window Gas for gas of glass units according to CEN 673 This type should only be used for longer rectangular glass unit cavities The equivalent thermal conductivities are calculated iteratively according to CEN 673 Defines whether the material is isotropic or orthotropic thermal conductivities This option is only available for standard materials Thermal conductivity If the material is isotropic then the second field is not available These values must only be entered for standard materials Long wave emission properties of the two surfaces in the direction of the heat flux if the emission properties are not directly calculated byflixo pro cf option dialog window document cavities E A q amp 2 These values must only be entered for Air Cavity and Gas Determines whether the cavity is venti
226. low you can see the assigned boundary conditions by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 29 Tutorials Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 1 Summary e Boundary conditions are arranged in the Boundary Condition flyout In the lower part of the flyout is the boundary condition database while in the upper part the boundary conditions present in the document can be found e New boundary condition objects are generated with the Boundary Condition tool 5 Only the starting point of a BC is defined On an exterior surface these BC run counterclockwise to the next BC starting point e The active boundary condition can either be chosen from the list containing all present boundary conditions in the document or from the boundary condition tool properties e With the option Only Vertices with change of direction in the boundary condition tool properties you can limit the possible start points to surface vertices with change of direction e If the according option is selected in the Option dialog window then the polylines of the set boundary condition are shown The display occurs time delayed depending on the complexity of the construction and on the used hardware You still can continue your work without any restriction O continue tutorial 1 you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top 30 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch
227. ltered similar to the materials in the Component flyout True lengths of surface lines are displayed for the Min Max Temperature object and Heat Flux object in the Properties flyout The capture spots on defining the boundary conditions can be limited to vertices with change of direction Additional key values of surface temperatures can be displayed individually cf Min by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch What s new in version 6 Max Temperature style and Temperature style the places after decimal point can be configured for the fRsi value if the temperature is not displayed e The places after decimal point from material and boundary condition entries can be configured in the Table Legends style optionally instead of the name the use type name can be used in the column legend e Creating new entries like materials boundary conditions etc by selecting the entry lt New gt in the drop down list e Several flixo pro files can be selected and opened with File Open dialog window e Boundary Conditions can be shown in the report pages with the same line widths like in the model the set up is done in the Result Object Style dialog window e DXF files can be dragged into the application window and imported automatically e Isotherms can be exported as DXF file too 1 3 What s new in version 5 A selection of new features and an update of flixo pro version 5 Model and Results e Streamlines to illustr
228. lue object Font Tab 4 4 1 11 Table Legend Style Description This style is used when you display a Material or Boundary Condition legend by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 199 Reference 200 Table Legend Style Le x Table Legend Style e X General Extended Font _ General Extended Font Name Table Legends Numbers Header F Thousands delimiter T Show header Alignment Background Cr E Show border peran Width 2 Ber a po E i Padding 0 200 are Horizontal 2 000 Millimeter Vertical 0 100 Millimeter Preview Preview Name Description Material Description Sy Value 1 0 100 MU auei 0 100 al Value 2 4 350 es Value 2 1 350 OK Cancel Cancel Fields General Tab Name Here you define the name of the style You cannot leave this field empty the chosen name must be unique i e not identical to another existing name Aside from these limitations you are free to choose any name Header This setting group contains the button Header Font which Show header Use type name Background Border activates a standard dialog window where the font style of the header can be adjusted Ifthis option is active then the header will be shown If this option is active then the type of the table Material or Boundary Condition will be shown instead of Name This group contains the settings for the background color of the
229. ly or user defined The wizard for the Psi Value calculation allows additional adjustments in the calculation The reference point can be outside of the construction The calculations of PSI Value Uf Value and UTJ Value are more flexible Automatic backup and recovery functions of open files after problems Roller Shutter Box U Value calculation according to EN ISO 10077 2 Automatically meet of the accuracy and termination criteria required by the standard EN ISO 10211 Relative heat flux stream error now also as a termination criterion Wizard to calculate the influence of screws according to prEN ISO 12631 Optimized calculation of the heat flow You can define for results optionally the number of decimal points or the number of significant digits Graphical objects are taken into account by the Cavity Wizard Advanced options when you assign a template to a document Remove the mesh and the results of the calculation Air cavities according to EN ISO 10077 2 2012 can be calculated also anisotropic Anisotropic calculated air cavities are shown in the material table User Interface Reports and documents are protected similar to Excel Actions and functions can be restricted specifically per file Start page with different links to open recently used files and to create new files Context help flyout with detailed explanations of the use of the active tool The order of the tabs can be customized colors can be assigned to the tabs S
230. lyout or in the Style drop down list in the Equivalent U Value tool properties The styles can also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 105 Reference Properties Kind Equivalent U Value v Style U Value extended Extended Figure 1 Equivalent U Value tool properties A Results To receive accurate results the following conditions must be fulfilled e equivalent U values should only be calculated for constructions where thermal bridges appear periodically cf figure 2 e the cross section line should be defined within sections through which no heat flux flows e g symmetrical axes or on edges where there the boundary condition heat flux density q 0 0 W m2K is set e If you choose an exterior reference system start and end points should lie on the exterior boundary of the construction If you choose an interior reference system start and end points should lie on the interior boundary of the construction Make note of the order of the inputs also here endpoint inputs are entered counterclockwise e Also consider the Comments section in the chapter Physical Explanation If you would like to interrupt the input before defining the 3rd point you can use context menu command right click Cancel or you can hit the ESC key
231. lyout windows can be grouped together as for example the materials boundary conditions components styles and layers flyouts are in the flixo pro default setting see User Interface and they can also be docked onto anywhere on the application window sides You can move flyouts by moving the top title section and with help of the appearing dock icon You can dissolve a grouped flyout from the group by moving the corresponding tab at the bottom of the flyout window and by docking it into a new position Auto Hide In an open state flyouts are only visible for a short moment after which they close automatically In a closed state flyouts are represented by tabs placed on the sides of the corresponding application windows You can open automatically closing flyouts by moving the mouse cursor over the corresponding tab or by actually clicking on the tab In the default setting of flixo pro see User Interface all Help flyouts close automatically Hide closed flyouts can be opened with the menu command View or by clicking on the corresponding icon on the standard toolbar List of the different Flyouts e Layers e Materials 158 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Flyout e Boundary Conditions Styles e Components e Documents Toolbox e Properties Context Help 4 3 1 Layers Flyout i Content Description Focus Layer Properties and their Symbols System Layers Creating a New Layer Deleting a La
232. m A to B counter clockwise W m b length of the projection of the roller shutter box AB m AT Temperature difference Interior Exterior K O Limitations 120 This tool can only be used on the report page and only if result objects of a previously calculated model are present Only 2 boundary condition temperatures can be present in the model Neither interior borders nor heat sources can be present There are exactly 2 adiabatic boundaries the distance of the adiabatic boundary at the bottom of the roller shutter box where it adjoins the window frame is 60 mm The temperature differences must have the same values for both sections Resistance of surface adjacent to the internal environment is 0 13 m2K W Resistance of surface adjacent to the external environment is 0 04 m2K W Vertical orientation of the roller shutter box the width of the roller shutter box will be always calculated as vertical projection by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools 4 1 21 Psi Value Tool Use Description The Psi Value tool allows you to calculate the Y values previously linear k value The Y value which quantifies additional energy is a correction value that is caused by linear shaped thermal bridges and is not taken into account in 1 dimensional energy calculations with U values The magnitude of the Y value depends on several values the quality of the construction the quality of the di
233. mensions as well as the U value which calculates the loss of heat of the undisturbed component Hence it is possible that a poorly insulating flat roof protection has a better P value than a well insulating window wall junction because in the case of the former the calculation of the Y value is done with exterior measurements through which part of the energy is already covered by thermal bridge energy losses by flat roof and wall measurements YP values can also be negative The calculation of Y values is explained in detail in tutorial 5 How do activate it The Psi Value tool can be activated with the menu command Psi Value in the menu Results or by clicking on the Y iconinthe Toolbox flyout Then you have to define the kind of Y value in the tool properties cf figure 1 e 2 Constructions e 3 Constructions e Edge Spacer How do use it The use meaningful applications physical explanations and limitations of the calculation kinds are explained in following chapters e 2 Constructions e 3 Constructions e Edge Spacer Properties Kind 2 Constructions x Style Psivalue extended Extended Figure 1 Psi Value tool properties by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 121 Reference 4 1 21 1 2 Constructions 122 Use Physics Limitations Description With the Psi Value tool kind 2 Constructions you can calculate Y values of constru
234. mmand or process can be used on the Import Model Master page and Report pages Import y Modell_ Master Seite Seite 1 Command or process can only be used on the Import page Import Modell Master Seite Seite 1 Command or process can only be used on the Model page Import Modell Master Seite Seite 1 Command or process can only be used on the Master and Report pages Menu Commands The description of menu commands is done in a shortened manner Select the menu command X Y e g Select the menu command File open rather than an elaborated description such as Select command Y from the menu X e g Select the command open from the menu file Glossar Ctrl Key Control key is used with another key to give a command When held down while using the mouse it usually invokes secondary mouse functions e g moving a copy of an object instead of moving the object itself Domain Material Domain A material domain is a basic element of a flixo pro document cross section A material domain will be displayed as a conjoined area or a composition of several such areas Draft Mode In draft mode the defined material domains are not filled with color Only the edges of material domains can be seen by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 293 Reference 294 Drag amp Drop Moves an object by clicking on it and holding down the mouse button dragging the object to the
235. mponents list Searching Component Database If you are looking for a specific component in the component database or if you would like to get an overview of a specific component group then you can use the filter function in the flyout 170 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Flyout Components Y Ss i Name Window v Match whole word only Match case Order Sort by Name Ascending D Descending ql gt day Figure 2 Components Search dialog window Figure 3 Toolbar To look for a component or a component group in the component database click on the a icon in the Flyout toolbar or use the context menu command right click Define Filter The Components Search dialog window appears Under Name you can enter the name or part of the component name that you are looking for After you have defined the filter criteria click on OK and the filter results will be displayed in the component database window of the flyout You can the switch between the Filter Criteria and the Filtered View settings by clicking on the Y icon in the Flyout toolbar or by using the context menu command right click Filtered View Inserting a Component into a Document To insert a component into a document proceed as follows e Open the document into which you would like to insert the component e Activate the Component flyout by clicking on the respective tab or by selecting the menu command View Compon
236. mporting Boundary Conditions Description The Boundary Conditions flyout allows the manipulation of boundary conditions in an active document Boundary conditions can be added or deleted and their properties changed The top tree view displays the boundary conditions that are present in the active document The bottom tree view displays boundary conditions from a boundary conditions databank which can be used for all documents The BC database is divided into two parts the first part is read only and is maintained by infomind or third party the second part includes all user defined materials The boundary by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Flyout conditions maintained by infomind or third party can be updated either using the menu command Update or in the Options dialog window Database Templates The Properties flyout shows the properties of the selected boundary conditions BC AX Gil BN Boundary Conditions a Rooms 9 7 Special HE Symmetry Model section 4 3 Additional BC Database w Special a ENISO 6946 B ENISO 10077 2 Frame 3 Interior E Interior reduced radiation KM Interior normal Interior frame 2 Exterior BB Exterior frame 1 4 sia 180 4 m r SL E M Bc gc B S Figure 1 Boundary Conditions flyout Creation Modification Duplication and Deletion of Boundary Conditions The following description is valid for both the top boun
237. n 154 A O NN 154 Tools Menu Submenu Protection Rei 155 Results Men A A A ee 155 Window MENU ds did 157 A A A NOA E A ee EE Flyout AAA A AES A Materials Flyout Boundary Conditions FlyQUt is isiin osoin iada gaa ai ui niaaa aa cnn rana 164 Styles Flyout 0 A essen a 167 Components FOU a A e A Oa e e an mE daa dais 168 Documents FElyout 2 ara aa aera Aaa a ai 172 TOOIbOX 21 oT E EET A EEE TT Properties Flyout Context Help Ahe TE 2 2 2 HH ATE TTT T E T T ETAT 175 AP DialOg With OWS E AT A A N 176 Styles Dial g Window r 22422202220 2a sense aa aara A IA dd 176 Result Object Style u ten caine E EARE AE aA EN A eens 176 Temperature Style 224400ssnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnannnnnnn 179 Min Max Temperature Style oooooomoncccnnnnccconoccccconcnononccononnnonannoncnonnnnnnnnnn nana nnnnnn nn nn nan nnnnnn nn cnn nn rnnnencncnan 182 SOM MS Sl a ral aude Ream mt Meet 184 NO 188 ICAL DES NS HA o dto os al 189 Streamline Ml a 191 UVa Sl re Teer ae ant ee E camer 193 U Valule xtended Style vavx i5 eh andi ee eatin arcana ea nee 195 PSi Value Style tests SOIL asados sere aN tr cerda de olas e AN ent al Sore 197 Mable Legend Wii id de ideada da 199 Legend Styler a A ea ae Gee ae ee te ee tet E eon 201 Dimension Styler cess 22 22 ad 204 Information Sloan a ce Aa OS nth Det e SANA sahen A Seen 205 Line Styler O eel bean 207 Region
238. n simply drag the material with the mouse into the desired category Copying Materials You can copy materials from the database to the materials list of the current document or vice versa by dragging the material to the desired location Searching the Material Database If you are looking for a specific material or you would like to get an overview of a specific material group then you can use the filter function in the flyout Filter Properties a Filter Xe al F Match whole word only F Match case Order Sort by Name v Ascending Descending Gl x d 819 Y Figure 3 Top part of Material flyout Figure 2 Dialog window Filter properties To look for a material or a material group in the material database click on the 4 icon in the by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 163 Reference flyout or use context menu command right click Define Filter The Filter properties dialog window will appear Under Name you can enter the name or part of the material name that you are searching for Additionally you can define the Category for which you would like to limit your search to After you have defined the filter criteria click on OK and the filter results will be displayed in the materials database window of the flyout You can the switch between the Filter Criteria and the Filtered View settings by clicking on the YY icon in the flyout o
239. n the standard toolbar These settings will automatically be loaded and applied the next time flixo pro is started Other document specific settings such as numbers of visible decimal places font size calculation precision etc apply for the current document These settings will be adapted in the template on which the document is based These settings can be adjusted in the following manner e Inthe Options dialog window category Document e In the Styles dialog window for example activated from the Styles flyout the appearance and the visible precision of the individual results can be configurated The creation of a template is explained in tutorial 6 Object specific properties refer to an object like local temperature object Psi value object etc You can adjust these settings as follows e In the Properties flyout e Inthe Object Properties dialog window e In the Style dialog windows For example in the Style flyout you can define the appearance and the precision of the results Coordinate System The coordinate system is a right handed coordinate system The units as well as the origin can be adjusted The coordinate origin can be adjusted by clicking on the icon in the upper left hand corner of both rulers and by moving the mouse cursor in the direction of the new origin At this point the mouse cursor symbolizes the zero point neutral point of the coordinate system from which the blue lines make up the axes of the s
240. nce TF Top Positions all objects in such a manner that all the encompassing rectangles of the selected objects align themselves to the top of the first marked object i Bottom Positions all objects in such a manner that all the encompassing rectangles of the selected objects align themselves to the bottom of the first marked object 4 2 5 3 Arrange Menu Submenu Same Dimension 4 2 6 154 2 Width Height r 2 Width and Height Tools Menu r Select Move Scale amp Rotate E Assign Properties 3 Cut Fr Crop lt Measure Distance Protection ER DXF Conversion Customize ES Options Changes the width of all objects to the width of the first marked object Changes the height of all objects to the height of the first marked object Changes the height and the width of all objects to that of the first marked object Activates the Select Move Scale tool Activates the Rotate tool Activates the Assign Properties tool Activates the Cut tool Activates the Crop tool Activates the Measure Distance tool Asubmenu with commands to protect objects reports and current documents from changes Converts a DMF file into a flixo pro file More detailed information can be found in tutorial 3 Shows the Customize dialog window You can hide and unhide toolbars create new toolbars add commands to toolbars with the Drag amp Drop function define keyboard shortcuts change the appearance of
241. ncel Fields Current Material In this list box you can determine the material name which should be replaced by the new material New Material In this list box you can define the material name which should replace the old material Cancel Cancels the entire action the materials of the construction will not be altered 4 4 5 10 Adapt Boundary Conditions Description The boundary conditions of the entire construction can be adapted by defining the new boundary condition and the boundary condition which is to be replaced Adapt Boundary Condition l Le s Current BC Symmetry Model section y New BC Interior normal horizontal v Cancel Fields Current BC In this list box you can define the boundary condition which should be replaced by the new boundary condition New BC In this list box you can define the boundary condition which should replace the old boundary condition Cancel Cancels the entire action the boundary conditions of the construction 254 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows 4 4 5 11 New File Description will not be altered The New File dialog window can be activated by using the context menu command New from the File menu You can either create a new document on the basis of a template or you can create a new template Template creation is described in more detail in tutorial 6 All flixo pro templates in the template directory and i
242. ndition from the boundary condition drop down list see figure 3 You can either change the selection in the Boundary Condition flyout or you can choose the respective boundary condition from the boundary condition drop down list in the tool properties The boundary condition can also be changed afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 4 1 13 Heat Source Tool Use Limitations Description The Heat Source tool allows to define heat sources and heat sinks in a construction How do activate it The Heat Source tool can be activated with the command Heat Source in the menu Insert or by clicking on the icon in the Toolbox flyout When the tool is active the mouse becomes al How do use it Mouse To create a heat source two steps are required Click on the spot where the heat source should begin The source is defined as soon as you click on the desired endpoint You can interrupt the entry process by right clicking and selecting Cancel from the context menu or by hitting Esc by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 81 Reference Keyboard For a keyboard input make sure that the Properties toolbar is visible If the toolbar is not visible you can activate it with the command Toolbox in the menu View Activate the toolbar by hitting the Tab key or by clicking on one of its fields You can activate the individual fields by repeatedly
243. ndows print dialog window with a few exceptions Only the differences will be described Print ua x lt Printer Name PARIS HP Laserjet 6P Properties Status Ready Type HP LaserJet 6P Where 192 168 0 107 L1 Comment Print to file What to Print Copies Active report s En ls Number of copies 1 aa Entire document 3 Master report 1 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 259 Reference Fields Active Report s If this option is selected only the current page will be printed cf tabs just below the main work area Depending on the Master Report setting the Master Report will be printed in addition Entire Document If this option is selected the entire document will be printed cf tabs just below the main work area Depending on the Master Report setting the Master Report will be printed in addition Master Page If this option is selected the master report will be printed O The Model page cannot be printed 4 4 5 16 Layers Description In the Layers option dialog window the properties of the layers can be adjusted Alternatively the layer properties can directly be adjusted in the Layers flyout _ LY eis Properties Y Visible Printable V Editable Fields Name Here the name of the layer is defined You cannot leave the field blank The name must be unique i e it cannot be identical to the name o
244. ne the settings pertinent to database and templates by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 215 Reference Options Y xs B Application General User Interface Locations Save z 3 ea Templates ProgramData infomind flixo 7 0 Templates ua Basic Units Material DB C ProgramData infomind flixo 7 0 db mat_ Derived units Data Exchange Bound Cond DB C ProgramData infomind flixo 7Mdbibc 7 i i Tools Component DB C ProgramData infomind flixo 7 0 db comj B Document Model Special Materials Cavities Update Backup Calculation Results Current Page Fields Templates Path to the directory where Document Templates are saved by default More detailed information can be found in tutorial 6 By clicking on the button a dialog window will appear where you can define the new template directory path in the text field If the directory does not yet exist it will be created after a respective warning Material DB Name of the current Material Database More detailed information on the material database can be found in the Materials flyout chapter After changing the name the corresponding material database will be loaded if the file exists If a database does not exist then a new database file will be generated Upon creation of a new database file you can choose whether to import the previous values into the new material database By clicki
245. ng on the button a dialog window is opened where a new database can be defined This setting is dependent on the User Interface language 216 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Bound Cond DB Component DB Update Backup 4 4 2 5 Basic and Derived Units Description Name of the current Boundary Condition Database More detailed information on the boundary conditions database can be found in the Boundary Conditions flyout chapter After changing the name the corresponding boundary conditions database will be loaded if the file exists If a database does not exist then a new database file will be generated Upon creation of a new database file you can choose whether to import the previous values into the new materials database By clicking on the button a dialog window is opened where a new database can be defined This setting is dependent on the User Interface language Name of the current Component Database More detailed information on the component database can be found in the Components flyout chapter After changing the name the corresponding components database will be loaded if the file exists If a database does not exist then a new database file will be generated Upon creation of a new database file you can choose whether to import the previous values into the new materials database By clicking on the button a dialog windo
246. nnnnnnnnn 240 Multiple Section Properties 1 re tt 241 File Pr perties Dial og WindoW 2 2 2 u 2 en dada 242 General Propertie Sna 2 2 e 242 Summary Properties ancene ne A A iaa 243 Content Properties suisid iii a a A ae hl eit ade ae hell 244 Gustom Pro erlies za eier Gave sacs UA a E a AAN AARNE AUN aLa needy ra 245 Various Dialog Windows ooonnnncccccnnnnnncnnncncnnnnananccn cnn 246 About Flixonase N anne E GA Gh alan GA ain aes 247 Overriting an old file helt A bee ill 248 A AN 248 Update Database iu cack rl RO SA el ada 249 Boundary Condition Temperatures 4444444000n44nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 251 Model Orientations nivdeddnier cons di lt di bed dd ca dica 251 Frame Material cocinar A AA AAA At 252 Adapt Size A a ai 253 Adapt Material titi AA Geena dada 254 Adapt BoOUNdaryGonditioNS viii A a ai 254 NeW cia d alice aa inGhna a A AIRE EA ARN a 255 Document Template a arn elena Lee Oa tds 256 Opening Pictures 2 42 42 122 ada 257 Page Setup sun Raise lead AAA tl Adve a heels 258 O STERLLTESELRLTENGETFEFET 259 Layers nn Ra EEE Oi dl ed O il 260 Materials ida A A ab 261 Boundary Conditions mitaaa aet aiaia a A td 264 Air Cavity Mat ria rtea een ie AAA A Aids 266 NeoW COMPONN blica E A ac RER ae 267 Calcula neien ariak A A AAA A A cd 268 Fields 2 AA A A AA A dan bd dd 270 Material Search tucan AAA A A AAA At 273 DOCU Mena Near s
247. nt room temperature e The temperature factor fRsi is only shown if there are exactly two boundary conditions in the model and the temperature on the surface is lower than the adjacent room temperature e The temperature factor fRsi is shown if there are more than two boundary conditions in the model and the temperature on the surface is lower than the adjacent room temperature In general the temperature factor fRsi cannot be used for other boundary condition temperatures 4 1 17 Min Max Temperature Tool Use Physics Limitations Description The Min Max Temperature tool lets you calculate and display the minimum maximum and average surface temperatures and the condensation zone along a surface line For the minimum surface temperature spot the fRsi factor the surface humidity at a given humidity and the critical humidity point at which surface condensation forms and or at which predefined surface humidity is reached along with the temperature factor are additionally calculated How do activate it The Min Max Temperature tool can be activate with the menu command Min Max Temperature in the menu Results or by clicking on the icon in the Toolbox flyout When I the tool is active the mouse becomes a in areas of possible start and endpoints How do use it The desired surface line is defined by entering a start and an endpoint Click on the boundary point where the surface line should begin The
248. nt which is now highlighted in black see Figure 1 can be moved by clicking on it and moving the point To delete a corner point choose the command Remove Vertex from the context menu as you right click on the particular vertex To add anew corner point click on the spot on the line where you want to insert the vertex A small circle now marks the spot see Figure 2 Now choose the command Split Edge from the context menu right click in order to add the new corner point Figure 1 Figure 2 Keyboard You can also change the position of a corner point with the keyboard Make sure that the tool properties are visible see Figure 3 If this is not the case then you can activate the Toolbox flyout and the Edit tool Mark the endpoint you wish to change with the keyboard The corner point will be highlighted as a small white square Now activate the tool properties by hitting the Tab key or by clicking on one of the fields You can activate the individual fields by repeatingly hitting the Tab key or by using the Tab key while the Shift key is held down For the coordinates the fields marked with x and y are relevant Enter the desired coordinates and finish the input entry by hitting the Return key by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 63 Reference All coordinates correspond to the current coordinate system The origin of the coordinate system can easily be adjusted Position Xx 7571
249. nu command Insert Object you can insert text and spreadsheet objects The properties of the tools can be defined in the options dialog window cf Tools Options or category Application gt Tools The properties of the generated results i e local temperatures can be determined in the Properties flyout and the graphic properties in the Styles dialog window The result styles can be found in the Styles flyout After finishing a report you can either print the report or display it as a preview before printing You can find those commands under the File menu 2 7 Settings You can change the appearance of flixo pro to suit your needs User Interface e Flyout domains i e Materials Boundary Conditions Toolbox Properties Context 20 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Settings Help can be positioned anywhere on the application window and they can be grouped together Flyouts can always be displayed they can always be hidden or they can appear as soon as the mouse cursor is moved over the tab e The toolbars can be arranged displayed and hidden as desired Additional commands can be added to or removed from the toolbar with the menu command Tools Customize Options Additional application specific settings such as units calculation priorities tool characteristics database paths can be adjusted in the Options dialog window cf menu command Tools Options category Application or icon i
250. object SHIFT Keep proportions Figure 1 Context Help flyout by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 175 Reference If the Context Help flyout is not visible it can be opened again by the corresponding command in the View menu 44 Dialog Windows 4 4 1 Styles Dialog Window In this chapter the style dialog windows are described in detail These styles are used to change the style of an object in flixo pro These dialog windows can be accessed from the Styles flyout Most dialog windows have a preview of the style on an example The following style dialog windows are explained in further detail e Result Object e Temperature e Min Max Temperature e Isotherms Vectors e Heat Flux e Stream Lines e U Value e U Value extended e Psi Value e Table Legends e Legends e Dimension e Information e Line e Regions e Text e Font Tab 4 4 1 1 Result Object Style Description This style is used when you are working with the Result Object tool The result object style dialog window encompasses properties of the place holder backgrounds the position of the result within the place holder the display scale and line label and font properties 176 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Result Object Style EEE Result Object Style A Name Background Color No Filling v E Show Border B
251. object 150 Insertlogo 49 Insert object 150 Insert page numbers 49 Insert picture 150 Insert result object place holder 50 Insert Text 142 Inserting a Component into a Document 168 Insertion of Components 168 Interior Boundaries 80 Interior Edge 293 Interior warmer than exterior 227 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Index Intersect 152 Isotherm 293 Isotherms Distance 184 Properties 184 Special Isotherms 184 Isotherms Style Properties 184 la Joint 47 Joint U Value 47 113 calculate 252 Properties 252 Joint U Value Style 195 Keywords 270 Le Language 213 Layer object 284 Dissolve Object 148 Edit 148 Transform 148 Layers Color 260 Printable 260 Visible 260 Layers Flyout 159 License 247 Limitations 142 Line Style Properties 207 Line Tool 138 Line Label and Font properties 176 Locations Database are saved 215 Locations Templates are saved 215 Logical Operations Group 152 Intersect 152 Intersection 291 Overview 290 Rotate 152 Subtract 152 Subtraction 292 Unification 290 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Unite 152 M Manager 270 MasterPage 19 Master Report Page 49 Material 261 copy 161 delete 161 duplicate 161 exporting 161 grouping 161 importing 161 rename 161 Material Database 161 Material Domain 293 Material legend style Properties 199 Material list 161 Material Wizard 228 Mate
252. object into the current document In the corresponding Layer Object dialog window you have to define the number of layers the layer s thickness the orientation and the materials You can also adapt the dimensions orientation and materials directly in the document using the usual methods and tools Inserts a glass unit object into the current document In the corresponding Glas Unit dialog window you have to define the glass unit type double or tripple glassings and other properties You can also adapt the dimensions orientation and material of the glass in the document directly by using the usual methods and tools Inserts a new embedded ora linked object The type of object by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 151 Reference 4 2 5 152 Arrange Menu Order Align Same Dimension H Group iy Ungroup Unite Intersect di Subtract dh Hor Mirroring 3 Ver Mirroring Sh Rotate 90 CW A Rotate 90 CCW p Snap to Grid and its options must be defined in the corresponding dialog window Embedded objects do not change in a flixo pro document when you edit the original file data After the insertion embedded objects become a part of the flixo pro document Double click on the object to edit it in its source file Linked objects will only change when the source file e g spreadsheet is modified with the appropriate program The data of a linked object is stored in th
253. om an existing file or from selected elements Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 2 Summary e Selected objects are grouped with the menu command Arrange Group H e You can create a component from the selected objects by clicking within the selected elements and by moving them with the Drag amp Drop function into the preview of the Components flyout al e Name and file path of the new components can be defined in a special dialog window Please consider that you need write permissions on the corresponding directory for saving the components 3 3 DXF Import The method by which existing geometry data from CAD programs e g AutoCAD can be used again is explained in this tutorial by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 33 Tutorials The goal of this tutorial is to import a cross section of a window construction that has been created with AutoCAD Figure 1 Window frame Content Adjusting the import settings and opening a DXF file Selection of to be imported layers Material assignment Deleting unused edges and closing boundary lines Converting DXF files and correcting problem spots 3 3 1 Adjusting the Import Settings and opening a DXF File Before importing data you should double check important flixo pro settings and then import a DXF file Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 3 Summary e The Import dialog window
254. omized later in the Properties flyout cf figure 1 118 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools 4 B 4 Name Style U Wert erweitert 4 U Value W m2 K 0 34747 4 Frame length calcula Max of projections 4 gt x mm 15 355 y mm 149 672 Width mm 79 608 Height mm 107 328 Figure 1 Properties Flyout for a Usb Value Object Defining Styles The presentation of a Roller Shutter Box U Value object can be selected in the Style list in the tool properties cf figure 2 The list shows all styles for Uf value objects that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new Roller Shutter Box U Value object is always created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles flyout or select the according style in the Style drop down list of the tool properties The styles can also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function cf tutorial 1 Properties Type Shutter box Usb Value 2 Style U Wertenwettert y Figure 2 Tool Properties Physical Explanations The Roller Shutter Box U Value is calculated according to EN ISO 10077 2 as follows by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 119 Reference D A B with Usb Roller Shutter Box U Value W m K O p Heat flux fro
255. on It is possible to protect the object without a password but if you did define a password a dialog prompting you for it will appear by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 279 Reference Protect Object CURA Password A Password for unprotecting the object Please reenter the password and take note of it Caution If you lose or forget a password it cannot be recovered It is advisable to keep a list of passwords and their Allow all users of this object to eier V Edit Edge Length Y Edit Material Edit Size Edit Object Cancel Fields Password You can enter a password or leave this field blank List with permitted You can protect the object selectively against changes of certain modifications properties The actions that are checked in the list are those which can later be modified Edit Edge Length Edge length can be modified with the Select Move Scale tool Edit Material A domain of the object can be assigned a different material Edit Size The entire object can be scaled Edit Object The parameter and the protection properties can be changed OK Selectively protects the object against changes of certain properties The actions that are checked in the list are those which can later be modified by the user If a password has been defined then a dialog window will appear prompting for a password Cancel Cancels the entire
256. on and then the Shift key The element angle is defined in the Options dialog window category Application gt Tools gt General Keyboard If you wish to rotate an object by a certain number of degrees you can define the rotation numerically Make sure that the object you would like to rotate is selected and that the Rotate tool properties are visible see figure 2 If this is not the case activate the Toolbox flyout and the Rotate tool see menu command View Tools Activate the tool properties by hitting Tab or by clicking on one of the fields You can activate the individual fields by repeatedly hitting the Tab key or by using the Shift Tab keys simultaneously For the rotation the field marked Angle is relevant Here the desired rotation angle is entered If you need to adjust the center of rotation you can do so in the subsequent two fields x and y and finish the input by hitting the Return key If the option Create Copy is activated a duplicate will automatically be created All coordinates correspond to the current coordinate system The origin of the coordinate system can easily be adjusted Figure 1 Rotate Angle 20Heg w 736 473 mm y 426 974 mm E Create Copy ab Properties by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 65 Reference Figure 2 Rotate tool properties 4 1 4 Assign Properties Tool Use Limitations Description Retroactively other materials from the
257. on in the Toolbox flyout When the tool is active the mouse becomes a I in areas of possible start and endpoints How do use it The surface line is defined through the input of the start and endpoints Click on one of the surface boundary points from which the surface line should begin The borders of the construction which will represent the surface line are then highlighted with a dashed line Move the mouse to the desired endpoint The dashed line now shows the section in which the heat flux will be calculated The line is defined as soon as you click on the desired endpoint If the SHIFT key is pressed while you define the surface line then the first click sets the start and endpoints automatically at the adjacent adiabatic edges e g construction sections If the start and endpoints are on the exterior boundary of a construction then lt JoAPP o gt calculates the heat flux from the start point counterclockwise if the surface line is on an internal boundary e g the inside of a chimney then the calculation is carried out clockwise If you wish to interrupt the entry before defining an endpoint then you can use the command Cancel from the context menu right click or you can hit the ESC key The value of the heat flux calculation is displayed and the start and endpoints of the surface line are labeled With the Select Move Scale tool or Edit tool respectively you can change the position of the label as well as the posi
258. on move the marked objects into the preview window of the components flyout Alternatively you can also switch to the Component tab and either click on the 4 icon or use the context menu command right click New Component of the corresponding category e In the appearing dialog window enter the name of the component Additionally you can also determine in which directory the data should be saved by clicking on the button As long as there is not a file with the same name you can finish by clicking the OK button If there is a file with the same name there are two remedies 1 you import the file as described above 2 you choose From Selection in the New Components dialog window and click on the OK button In this case the existing component will be overwritten by the new component that contains the elements which you selected Changing and Deleting Components To change a component you must open the corresponding file You can do this by clicking on the Bi icon or by using context menu command right click Edit or by simply double clicking on the name of the component The component file is opened in flixo pro and can be edited and saved like other documents To delete a component from the component list select the component and then click on the X icon or the context menu command right click Delete to remove the component Note that the component file itself will not be deleted rather only the entry will be deleted from the co
259. on of the dimension lines the relative position of the label and the start and endpoints The type of label e g the number of post decimal placeholders and the graphical properties of the dimension lines can be changed with the corresponding Styles in the Styles flyout Defining Styles The presentation of a dimension line object can be defined in the Style list in the Dimension tool properties see figure 1 The list shows all styles for dimension line objects that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new dimension line object will always be created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles flyout or in by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 135 Reference the Style drop down list in the Dimension tool properties The styles can also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 Properties Type Orthogonal v Style Dimension v Extended Figure 1 Dimension tool properties O e This tool can only be used on the report page and only if result objects of a previously calculated model are present 4 1 23 Information Tool Use Limitations Description The Information tool allows you to prompt information of material domains and boundary conditions of any given construction points
260. oom humidity Thus the surface humidity must be respectively calculated for different interior temperatures and room humidities Room humidity 100 is shown where condensation forms If the room humidity is equal or higher than the calculated room humidity 100 as in the example above 49 then condensation forms at this spot This value depends on the selected interior temperature and therefore the room humidity must be respectively calculated for different interior temperatures Room humidity 980 is shown at the surface temperature spot where the surface humidity is 80 In the example above with a 39 room humidity there would be an 80 humidity at that minimum surface temperature spot This value depends on the selected interior temperature and therefore the room humidity must be respectively calculated for different interior temperatures The critical surface humidity e g to analyse a potential mildew problem as well as the room humidity can be adjusted in the Properties flyout O FREE e The temperature tool can only be used on report pages and only if a calculated model result object is present by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools e The critical room humidities and the surface humidity are only shown if this option is selected in the corresponding Styles if the point is on a boundary segment with a temperature h value boundary condition and the temperature is lower than the adjace
261. or exterior edges runs counterclockwise to the starting point of the next boundary condition e You can either choose the active boundary condition from the upper list displaying all boundary conditions present in the current document or from the boundary condition tool properties e Boundary conditions of the type frame recognize corners according to EN ISO 10077 2 and automatically set the correct h value heat transfer coefficient respectively the correct R value thermal resistance according to the standard e With the option Only Vertices with change of direction in the boundary condition tool properties you can limit the start points to surface vertices with change of direction e If the corresponding option is selected in the Option dialog window then the polylines of the defined boundary condition are shown The visualisation occurs time delayed depending on the complexity of the construction and on the used hardware You still can continue your work without any restriction e Radiation properties in heat flux direction are either assigned directly to the cavity material or calculated by flixo pro You can define the method in the Option dialog window by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 41 Tutorials e ifthe radiation properties are calculated by flixo pro then you can assign radiation properties to the surfaces with the Boundary Condition tool 5 You can also create them automatically with a mater
262. order Line Color y Style f y Weight 0 000 Millimeter v Type p Result Object Style General Position Scaling Lines Labels Font Limit Scale Factor Scale Factor ypical scales 1 1 v Page distance World distance Bier 7 15 Bes by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 177 Reference Result Object Style ar General Postion Scaling Lines Labels Font Style Line X Line Weight 0 200 Milimeter N Type E End Point Markers Type X End X Preview 1 amp OK Cancel Fields General Tab Name Here you define the name of the style You cannot leave this field empty the chosen name must be unique i e the name cannot be identical to another existing name Aside from these limitations you are free to choose any name Background This group contains the settings for the background color of the result object area It allows you to hide unhide and adjust the border lines Border This setting group determines the characteristics of the line which circumscribes the result object color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm Position Tab Margins In this group you can adjust the size of the borders circumscribing the results Alignment In this group
263. ordinate system can be adjusted by clicking on the icon in the upper left hand corner of both rulers by dragging the mouse in direction of the new 32 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Advanced Techniques origin and by then releasing While adjusting the position of an object with the keyboard cf Select Move Scale tool the x and y coordinates indicate the position of the reference point 422 e The order and visibility of objects are taken into account when calculated The order of the selected domain can be adjusted in the menu Arrange or by clicking on the corresponding icon hy 7 i respectively Hi in the Arrange toolbar A rectangular domain is defined with two mouse clicks of the Rectangular Domain tool The corner points are captured with active snap functions Grid H Guidelines l and Objects Id cf menu Arrange The inputs can be entered partially with the mouse and partially with the keyboard The tool flyout is activated by first pressing the TAB key You can switch the focus step by step to the next control field of the tool flyout by further pressing the TAB key You can activate the r Select Move Scale tool temporarily by held down Alt key After releasing the Alt key the previous tool is active again O continue the tutorial you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top 3 2 3 Grouping Creating own Components You can create a new component fr
264. ording to EN ISO 10077 2 The EN ISO 10077 2 differentiates between two categories of air cavity material domains e Unventilated air cavities e Slightly ventilated cavities and grooves Figure 2 Domain definition Activate the Cavity Wizard and click on the spot where you want to position the first corner point of the domain Then click on the spot where you want the second corner point to be until you have created the domain in mind To finish the input process and thus to close the domain there are two possibilities e Click on the point where you began the starting point of the visible line When you I reach this point with the mouse the cursor should become a 19 e Choose the command Close from the context menu right click The Cavity Wizard will automatically create the corresponding material domains Figure 3 Air Cavities If you want to remove a point you have just defined choose the command Remove Previous from the context menu right click To interrupt the entire domain entry process you can either choose Cancel from the context menu right click or you can hit the ESC key If you additionally press the Shift key while you are drawing then the entry will be limited to the multiple of an element angle First release the mouse button and then the Shift key The element angle can be defined in the Option dialog window Application gt Tools gt General Defining Materials The Cavity Wizard needs two air cavit
265. ou can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles flyout or select the according style in the Style drop down list of the tool properties The styles can also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function cf tutorial 1 Properties Kind Joint UTJ Value y Style U Value extended v J Figure 3 Tool Properties Physical Explanations The joint U value is calculated according to EN 13947 as follows 116 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools with Total heat flux in to or out of the model W m AT Temperature difference K U U Value of the panel or glazing W m K b Width of the glazing or the panel m b Width of the frame m If the calculated construction is a mullion or a transom than 2 glazing or panels are used the formula is as follows amp VE AT g gi TAS b f O Limitations Joint U values can only be calculated for constructions which are recognized as window frames according to EN 13947 U b en p e Materials which defines the frame dimension can occur exclusively in the frame if necessary you have to create duplicates of materials e There are exactly 2 boundary condition temperatures e There are exactly 2 adiabatic boundary conditions Symmetry Model Section each one on both model sections e Either it s a horizontal or a vertical window
266. ouse becomesa 1 How do use it Mouse After you have activated the Rectangular Domain tool you can define the rectangle with two points which lie diagonal from one another Click on the place where you would like to set the first point When you move the mouse you will see a dashed preview of the domain which constantly changes as you move the mouse When you click again you will determine the second point defining the domain If you hold down Ctrl when you draw the domain the first point is not a corner point of the domain but rather the center point of the domain If you hold down the Shift key when you draw the domain then a square will be created The combination of both keys then allows you to create a square that is defined by its center point You can interrupt the input of a domain by right clicking and choosing Cancel from the context menu or by hitting the ESC key Keyboard After you have activated the Rectangular Domain tool make sure that the Rectangular Domain tool properties are visible If this is not the case then you can make them visible with the menu command View Toolbox see figure 1 Hit the Tab key or click on the first field of the tool properties You can activate the individual fields by repeatedly hitting the Tab key or by using the Tab key while the Shift key is held down You can enter the coordinates the dimensions and the reference of the domain The coordinates of the reference point can be entere
267. ows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 6 Summary e General document settings which are normally used should be defined in the template Settings defined in the Options dialog window of the category document are automatically assumed when a new document is created e Materials and boundary conditions which are often used can be copied with the Drag amp Drop function from the database to the upper list containing all materials or boundary conditions present in the document e It is easiest to define the number of decimal places and other result properties in the Styles flyout O continue the tutorial you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top 3 6 4 Saving the Document Template The document template should be saved in a particular directory so that they are displayed in the Dialog window New File if a new document is generated with the menu command File New By default this directory can be found in the templates subcategory of the flixo Pro program directory In the Save Options dialog window you can determine which directory should be accessed when a template is activated Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 6 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 51 Tutorials Summary e Document templates should be saved in the template directory The template directory can be found and if necessary adjusted in the Save Options dialog window
268. port Protect Document Layer Object Glass Unit Object Various Warnings About flixo Description In this dialog window you can find copyright information and details about your license The dialog window can be activated with menu command Help About flixo Y X Copyright 1999 2012 by infomind ltd All rights reserved info infomind ch http www infomind ch 0 The product is licensed to Flux lso Number 2 1911884 NOT FOR RESALE 7 0 580 1 16 11 2012 Waming This computer program is protected by copyright law and intemational treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of OK it is forbidden and may result in severe civil and criminal penalties Portions Copyright E 1999 2009 CodeJock com Paintlib Copyright 1996 2000 License Ulrich von Zadow JPEGlib Copyright IJG and Thomas G Lane 1994 1998 LibPng Copyright Gits Contibuting Authors Group 42 Inc LibTiff Copyright SGI and System Info Sam Leffler 1988 199 Fields License Determines your license and saves it to a file System Info Displays the Windows System Info dialog window where you can find information about your computer programs and components http www infomind ch When you click on this hyperlink your web browser opens and goes to this address There you can find the newest info about flixo info infomind ch When you click on this hyperlink your mail program opens and creates a blank
269. pproximations Because these domains have to be broken down for the computational process neither true ellipsis nor true circles are created flixO pro generates a polygon approximation The quality of these approximations i e the number of points on the polygon can be determined How do activate it The Elliptical Domain tool can be activated with the command Elliptical Domain in the menu Insert or by clicking on the icon in the Toolbox flyout When the tool is active the mouse becomesa 73 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Reference How do use it The use of the Elliptical Domain tool is similar to that of the Rectangular Domain tool The only difference is that the indicated coordinates and dimensions do not define a rectangle but rather the dimensions of the bound ellipse Also here the holding down of the Shift key means that the dimensions in vertical and horizontal direction are identical i e a circle is created Number of Reference Points on the Polygon The number of reference points on the polygon determines how precise the elliptical circular approximation is The higher the number of points the better the approximation However you should take into account that as the number of reference points increases the calculation performance will also be prolonged The number of reference points on the polygon can be determined in the No of Segments field in the Ellipse
270. properties dialog window e General e Summary e Contents e Custom General Properties Description This tab shows the general information of a file such as the file path the save date and general file properties by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows tutorial4_2_DE flx Properties E x General Summary Contents Custom Type fico Document Location C Program Files nfomind flixo 5 Tutorials Size 48 5KB 49 664 bytes MS DOS Name TU085C 2 FLX Created 11 04 2007 10 49 26 Modified 11 04 2007 10 49 26 Accessed 29 05 2007 09 32 10 Atributes E Read only F Hidden Y Archive System ox _ cance Fields Type Location Size MS DOS Name Created Modified Accessed Attributes 4 4 4 2 Summary Properties Description File Type usually Flixo pro documents File path of the document File size in MB and bytes Name of the file in MS DOS format These names have a maximum of 8 characters and a 3 character data type ending Shows the date and time when the document was created Shows the date and time when the document was last modified Shows the date and time when the document was last accessed Shows the attributes of the file and allows you to modify them Ifa file is a read only document then the document cannot be modified until the write protection is removed This tab contains information that facilitates the sear
271. pted by users If a password has been defined then a dialog window will appear prompting for a password by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 283 Reference Cancel Cancels the entire action The document is not protected 4 4 5 33 Layer Object Description In this dialog window you can create a new parametric object constructed by material layers or you can edit an existing one The preview is only schematic in order to easily recognize the layers and select them directly in the preview The layers will either be displayed horizontally or vertically and their length will be ignored In the orientation control group you can define the orientation of the layers by clicking on the circle representation or by numerically editing the corresponding field By clicking inside one of the small squares in the circle representation the corresponding multiple of 15 will be set In the table you can choose the material property of a layer from the list of materials existing in the document or create a new material in the opening Material dialog window and you can adapt the layer thickness With the buttons right of the table you can move insert and delete layers The thickness as well the material properties can also be changed in the usual way e g Select Move Scale tool Drag amp Drop 284 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Drientation
272. puts also here endpoint inputs are entered counterclockwise e This Psi value kind should only be calculated for cases where two connections of the 3 components are identical or where one junction is thermal bridge free e Also consider the Comments section in the chapter Physical Explanation 1600 00 amp 23 4 Wim U 0 23 W m K E U 1 03 Wim K 23 426 Wise AT Ub U b u U b 1 031 0 237 0 230 1 600 1 419 0 037 0 116 W m K 30 000 Figure 3 Physical Explanation The Y value with 3 components is calculated as follows if both junctions constructions are identical by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 129 Reference _ Padim Pidim AT 2 respectively if the Y value of one connection is zero e g in figure 3 the other Y value is calculated as follows _ Padim Pidim y AT The total heat flux per linear meter consists of following partial fluxes Padim Pac respectively if the heat fluxes through the cross sections are taken into account cf Properties flyout Padim Pa c Papa c o The heat flux which is already taken into account through the 1 dimensional point of view is calculated as follows Pidim Ua e lag Up c Ipc Up_e Ips where O heat flux from A to C counterclockwise W m heat flux from B to A counterclockwise W m O y heat flux from Cto D counterclockwise W m AT if
273. ques how to create polygon material domains and components as well as how to set guidelines In figure 1 a window frame is illustrated This construction will be generated step by step Figure 1 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 31 Tutorials Content Using Components Rotating and Mirroring Extending Construction Grouping Creating own Components 3 2 1 Using Components Rotating and Mirroring The construction of this example consists mainly of 2 parts which are interconnected window and wall It s possible to save often used elements as components in flixo pro and to reuse them Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 2 Summary e Components with the Drag amp Drop function can be moved and inserted into the preview of the Components flyout Sas well as into the application window e Selected elements can be rotated 90 d respectively Shor mirrored 3 respectively J by clicking on the according icon in the Arrange toolbar or by selecting the according commands in the Arrange menu O continue the tutorial you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top 3 2 2 Extending Construction The construction can be completed and adjusted in different ways You can position elements exactly enlarge regains and create missing objects Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 2 Summary The origin of the co
274. r with change of direction The boundary condition is now represented as a point which has the color of the corresponding boundary condition see Boundary Condition flyout Only the start points of the boundary conditions are defined see figure 1 The boundary conditions are shown deferred as polygons if the corresponding option is selected in options dialog window cf User Interface Options dialog window When you calculate the construction the validity of the construction is also computed After doing so the boundary conditions will be shown with the corresponding color around them see figure 2 Following rotational direction rules apply for boundary conditions e General The boundary condition of the starting point is valid for all edges where there is material to the left of the boundary condition up to the next starting point see figure 1 and figure 2 Exterior Boundaries for all edges the boundary condition runs counterclockwise from the starting point to the next starting point Interior Boundaries for all edges the boundary condition runs clockwise from the starting point to the next starting point 80 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools Figure 1 Figure 2 Properties Z Only Vertices with change of direction BC interior frame y Figure 3 Defining Boundary Conditions A new boundary condition is always created by the indicated boundary co
275. r by using the context menu command right click Filtered View Exporting and Importing Materials The Export command from the context menu right click for the category materials or database allows you to export the corresponding user defined material s to a comma separated CVS file The selection of the exported materials is defined by the mouse cursor position at the time the context menu is prompted Only the user defined materials can be exported Besides loading an existing material database or creating a new database cf Options you can complement the existing flixo pro material database with data from specially structured text files To do this use the context menu command right click Import The data will either be inserted into the database or into a category The position for the insertion of the date depends on whether you right click on the database icon or on the category icon The structure of the comma separated text file corresponds to that of the materials export file To create a comma separated text file with the correct structure it is easiest to export an existing database and then edit that file with a spreadsheet program e g Excel making sure to save the file as a CVS text file 4 3 3 Boundary Conditions Flyout 164 El Content Description Creation Modification Duplication and Deletion of Boundary Conditions Grouping Boundary Conditions into Categories Copying Boundary Conditions Exporting and I
276. rag amp Drop function you can independently from the active tool assign a material from the database list or from the document material list u e Air cavities in the window frame are filled with the Air Cavity EN ISO 10077 2 tool BS The user defines the domain in which all cavities and open domains are automatically filled with special air cavity material according to the standard O continue the tutorial you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top 3 4 3 Assigning Boundary Conditions and Radiation Surface Properties 40 When assigning boundary conditions you are defining the start point for the boundary condition cf tutorial 1 The boundary condition is valid from this point to the next boundary condition which runs counterclockwise boundary conditions run clockwise for interior cavities e g chimneys or floor heating In the interior corners of the frame special boundary conditions for domains with reduced radiation and convection can be placed according to EN ISO 10077 2 cf figure 3 The boundary condition for reduced radiation and convection can be used on the interior side of the domain where the width b is normally as big as the depression d although should not exceed 30 mm 45 ope eo Figure 3 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Window Frame Analysis and Wizards In our example we can adjust the boundary conditions in two places on the interior side
277. rame length calcula Max of projections 4 Frame Materials EPDM Aluminium Y Super Illen soda lime Polysulfid 1 7 Tecatherm Fa Silicagel Trocke Edelstahl Fa En Butyl Isobuten Polyurethan PL Luftschicht sch Mineralische un silcone Phonotherm Aluminium Pan 7 4 j j j x mm 23 000 y mm 129 914 Width mm 174 000 Height mm 91 146 Figure 2 Properties flyout for the joint U value object The definition of a joint U value is explained in detail in tutorial 5 In special cases if the frame width can t be exactly defined using the frame materials e g Z Profiles you can also adapt the dimension manually by moving the position of the start points of the dimension objects using the Select Move Scale tool or the Edit tool respectively You can also change the text positions of the help objects of the U values of the base construction and the dimension lines with the same tool by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 115 Reference Defining Styles The presentation of a joint U Value object can be selected in the Style list in the tool properties cf figure 3 The list shows all styles for joint U value objects that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new joint U value object is always created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list Y
278. rd can be used O continue the tutorial you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 53 Tutorials 3 7 2 3 8 54 Defining a Parameteric Object In the following steps you will first dissolve all of the parametric edges of a predefined spacer and subsequently you will define 2 new parametric edges Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in this tutorial Summary e Parametric objects can be generated edited and dissolved with the commands from the Edit Parameter menu point e The definition of parametric edges can be done in two steps with the mouse Defining the edge whose length can be changed and Defining all vertexes which are also to be moved when the edge length is changed e With the menu command Tools Protection gt Protect the object parametric objects can be protected and other actions prevented Screw according to EN 13947 In this tutorial the definition of a periodically existing screw as an equivalent 3 dimensional object is explained and critical points are emphasized The equivalent lambda values for equivalent 3 dimensional objects and bordering air cavities are calculated directly by flixo pro according to EN 13947 depending on distances dimensions and hidden materials In the next step you will define a screw as an equivalent 3 dimensional object of a mullion construction Following the calcu
279. re set in the Highlighted Line frame This setting group determines the properties of highlighted streamlines color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm This style is used when you are working with the U Value tool The U value style consists of a section line line segment with two end point markers and of a connected label line U Value Properties Style ee UU Value Properties Style NY amp General Extended Font Extended General Name Numbers Digits 3 4 Thousands delimiter 2 Show units 4 Show result symbols Weight 0 200 Type v End Point Markers Begin v Preview Indicator Line Decimal Points zZ End v U 293 168 Wi m K Section Line Line Weight 0 200 2 Millimeter Type zZ ar End Point Markers o v Preview U 293 17 WI m K Cancel by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z ric h www infomind ch 193 Reference Fields General Tab Name Digits Thousands delimiter Show Units Show result symbols Style Line End Point Markers Extended Tab Line End Point Markers Use custom boundary 194 Here you define the name of the style You cannot leave this field empty the chosen name must be unique e not identical to another exis
280. reated according to EN ISO 10077 2 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 221 Reference Export Physical Model Mirror everything vertically 4 4 2 8 Tools General Description If this option is selected the physical model will also be exported If this option is selected all data will be mirrored vertically This option should be set for applications e g browsers where the positive y axis points to the bottom The following settings are generally used by all tools and in part Zoom Pan these settings overlap with the functioning of the tools Options Y X B Application General User Interface T Show Tool Tips Save j Database Templates v Activate mouse wheel zoom Basic Units V Activate the Pan function Derived units v Activate extended selection mode 3 Data Exchange V Merge Edit and Selection tool DXF Import Y Activate alternate tool T a Import Export V ESC aktiviert Selektionswerkzeug Tools Sore Constrain angle 15 0 Object Capturing Multiple use Result Object Tool Y Heat Source A Cavity Wizard iv Result Object B Document Temperature Model Min Max Temperature Special Materials V Heat Flux Density Cavities en b Calculation OK Cancel Fields Show Tool Tips Activate mouse wheel zoom 222 Determines whether Tool Tips short help texts next to the mouse cursor should appear Determines whether the mous
281. resentation of additional values of surface points can be changed with the corresponding Style in the Styles flyout With the Select Move Scale tool and Edit tool respectively you can change the position of the label and its reference point a 9 79C 8si 9 1 C f 0 636 Pa 100 _ 49 39 ar Figure 1 Label of a temperature You can adjust the critical surface humidity and the humidity of the neighboring rooms which influences the optional results in the Properties flyout cf figure 2 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools 2j 4 Name Style Temperaturen m 4 Temperature C 18 79968 fRSi 0 960 Surface humidity 54 Room humidity for con 93 Room humidity for criti 74 4 Room humidity 9 50 Surface threshold humic 80 4 fRSi Custom E 4 x mm 123 300 y mm 127 446 Width mm 54 527 Height mm 55 760 Figure 2 Properties flyout of a temperature object lying on the surface Defining Styles The presentation of an object can be defined in the Style list of the Temperature tool properties The list shows all styles for temperature objects that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new temperature object will always be created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list see figure 3 You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles flyout or in the Style drop down list in
282. rials Air cavity 39 assign 28 39 automatically assign 42 define 28 search 28 Materials database dialog window 262 Materials Flyout 161 Maximum Temperature 91 Measure distance 69 Measurements within a result object 135 Menu Commands Overview 143 Mesh 293 Mildew Problem 87 Min Max Temperature Tool 91 Min Max Temperature 91 Min Max Temperature Style 182 Properties 182 Min Max Temperature Tool 91 Minimum Surface Temperature 91 Model Calculate 145 Model Orientation 251 Model Page 18 Models 16 Mouse wheel zoom 222 Move 26 59 Move corner point 62 Mullion 47 303 flixo 7 Help Multiple of a basic angle 64 Name of the current Boundary Condition Database 215 Name of the current Component Database 215 Name of the current Material Database 215 Neumann 264 New Component 168 267 New document 52 New Features 10 11 13 New File 255 New Material 161 New Style 167 New Temperature Object 87 Number of FE 270 Number of Pages 270 Number of Reference Points 73 Number of Temperatures 270 Numerical Solution 293 O Object Display Properties 145 Object Properties Dialog Window Domain Object Properties 238 Frame U Value Properties 240 General Properties 237 Line Object Properties 238 Overview 236 Result Object Properties 239 Objects Align 152 Cutting 291 Intersect 152 Subtract 152 Subtraction of Objects 292 Unification 290 Unite 152 Open 143 Open most recent used file after progr
283. roceed with the current domains Stop Continue Fields Stop The calculation has stopped and all necks will be highlighted where the cavities may be subdivided according to standard EN ISO 10077 2 By repeatedly clicking on the Zoom In button in the message bar all highlighted necks will be shown step by step in order to subdivide them manually using the Cut tool The markers will only disappear after the next calculation Continue The calculation continues with the current subdivisions Logical Operations flixo pro offers the possibility to use logical operations on material domains It allows you to unite cut or subtract domains These types of operations are useful to create complex shapes from several separate shapes The following chapter describes these commands Chapter subjects e Union operations e Cutting operations e Subtraction operations Unification of Objects Description This operation unites selected material domains The result of the unification is a single object which takes on the form of the sum of all participating domains This operation allows the creation of a single object out of many different domains or the creation of domains that contain cavities but are composed of one single object The operation will unite all overlapping material domains the border lines will be automatically removed If there are domains with different materials then the new domain will assume the ma
284. rrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 4 38 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Window Frame Analysis and Wizards Summary e Arectangular domain is created with the Rectangular Domain tool O The corner points are captured with active snap functions Grid u Guidelines land Objects see menu Arrange The origin of the coordinate system can be adjusted by clicking on the icon in the upper left hand corner of the rulers and moving the mouse in the direction of the new origin and releasing at the desired spot e When adjusting the position of an object with the keyboard cf Select Move Scale tool KR the x and y coordinates represent the position of the reference point e When adjusting the size of an object with the keyboard cf Select Move Scale tool r the reference point determines the point of the circumscribing rectangle which is not moved during the adjustment e The order of the objects and their visibility is taken into account during the calculation You can adjust the order of the selected domain with the Arrange menu commands or by clicking on the corresponding icon Y 2 i respectively Li in the arrange toolbar Selected elements can be rotated 90 z respectively Sor mirrored respectively dh by either clinking on the according icons in the arrange toolbar or by selecting the corresponding commands in the Arrange menu O continue the
285. rst mouse click you define the benchmark with the second mouse click you define the direction of the line and cut the domains If the Shift key is pressed while determining the cutting line then the angle will be limited to the multiple of the element angle First release the mouse button and then the Shift key The element angle can be defined in the Options dialog window Application gt Tools gt General Keyboard The entry of a closed polygon see Input Polygon as a cutting line with the keyboard is done in a similar way to using the Polygon Domain tool The entry of a line see Input Line as a cutting line is done by determining two reference points on the line Coordinates Cartesian or accordingly by determining one point and the direction of the line Coordinates Polar The cutting is carried out by in that the Cut key is activated by repeatedly hitting the Tab key and by then hitting the Return key Alternatively you can just click on the Cut key by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 67 Reference Figure 1 Example of a cutting path Position Position x 947928 mm y 319 024 mm x1 100 000 mm yt 100 000 mm x2 200 000 mm y2 200 000 mm Properties Properties Only selected objects Only selected objects Input Input Polygon v Straight line v Absolute Relative Absolute Relative Coordinates Coordinates 9 Cartesian Polar Cartesian Polar Fi
286. rticular styles by entering the desired term in the filter field in the top part of the flyout In figure 2 for example all styles containing val in their names are selected The list view can be sorted by clicking on the titles name or type In figure 1 for example the list of styles types is sorted in a descending manner 4 3 5 Components Flyout El Content Description Creating a New Component Changing and Deleting Components Searching Component Database Inserting a Component into a Document Exporting and Importing Component File Lists 168 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Flyout Description The Components flyout allows the management of components Components are construction elements such as window frames or wall constructions that are regularly used in the various documents In the upper half of the flyout the list of the components at your disposal is displayed In the lower half a preview of the selected component is visible figure 1 New components can be created existing ones changed or deleted Components can also be grouped together in categories just like material and boundary conditions can be organized in such a manner see Materials chapter for further details Working with components is explained in detail in tutorial 2 E ax Y xa a Components a E Seitengew nde a Fensterbank H Br stungsabdeckung 1 43 Hintersturz a Hohlsturz H E Sturzverklei
287. rting Boundary Conditions The Export command from the context menu right click for the database category or boundary conditions allows you to export the corresponding user defined boundary conditions to a comma separated CVS file The selection of the exported boundary conditions is defined by the mouse cursor position at the time the context menu is prompted Besides loading an existing boundary condition database or creating a new database cf Options you can complement the existing flixo pro boundary condition database with data from specially structured text files To do this use the context menu command right click Import The data will either be inserted into the database or into a category The position for the insertion of the data depends on whether you right click on the database icon or on the category icon The structure of the comma separated text file corresponds to that of the boundary condition export file To create a comma separated text file with the correct structure it is easiest to export an existing database and then edit that file with a spreadsheet program e g Excel making sure to save the file as a CVS text file 166 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Flyout 4 3 4 Styles Flyout E Content Description Creating and Duplicating a Style Changing and Deleting a Style Search Styles Sort Views Description The Styles flyout allows the manipulation of styles in an a
288. s in the menu Tools or by clicking on the icon ES O continue tutorial 1 you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top 3 1 2 Entering Model Geometry The physical model comprises individual domains which together are delineated by a border The construction in our tutorial is exclusively comprised of rectangular domains Generally however the domains can take on any form Next you will enter the geometry of the construction step by step The final result of the input can be seen in the figure below which indicates the names of the layers as well as the materials used in the individual layers 26 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Basic Techniques Wall Construction Exterior stucco Lime sand Exterior wall Brick Insulation Insulation Interior wall Brick Interior plaster Gypsum sand Ceiling Construction Wood flooring Floor coverings underlay wool Subflooring Cement sand Wall sound insulation stripping Insulation Ceiling sound insulation Insulation Reinforced concrete ceiling Reinforced concrete with 1 steel Interior plaster ceiling Gypsum sand The geometry of the physical model is entered with both the mouse and the keyboard O Hints e In dialog windows you can skip to the next entry field by using the Tab key If the Shift and the Tab key are used simultaneously then you can skip back a field e Wh
289. s application allows you to use documents which have been generated with CAD software e g AutoCAD Window Frame Analysis and Wizards In this tutorial the different wizards which facilitate data entry for the materials table and database are explained Furthermore the modeling and analysis of window frames according to European norms is described Psi Value and U Value calculation In this tutorial different Psi values Psi value with 2 components Psi value with 3 components and edge Psi value as well U values U joint value according to EN 13947 equivalent U value U value for constructions with two layers are calculated Document Templates In this tutorial the creation and arrangement of document templates is illustrated With document templates you can easily change the appearance and characteristics of documents based on the template If for example your company logo should appear on all report pages 24 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch then a template containing this loge can be created Parametric Objects This tutorial illustrates how you can define edges as a parameter of complex objects In a second step you will adjust these edge lengths so that the component can exactly be inserted into a new situation Screws according to EN 13947 This tutorial illustrates the definition of a periodically existing screw as an equivalent 3 dimensional object Important and relevant poin
290. s can be defined in the corresponding dialog window Hides or unhides the stream density temperature color fields false coloring of the stream density distribution for the selected result object The properties of the color fields can be defined in the Options dialog window which can be activated with the menu command Options in the Tools menu Explicitly refreshes all results Should the result objects be automatically refreshed after every change then the corresponding option can be set in the Options dialog window which can be activated with the menu command Options in the Tools menu e Some of these commands can only be used after the model has been calculated Calculate e The display of isotherms temperature fields stream lines for stream density fields Uf values and legends is only possible when a result object is selected 156 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Menu Commands 4 2 8 Window Menu New Window Auto Hide All New Vertical Tab Group New Horizontal Tab Group Close all documents Window List More Windows 4 2 9 Help Menu Contents flixo online Tutorials Check for Updates by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Opens another window for the current document Closes all Flyout domains Arranges the active window in a new vertical tab group This menu command is only visible if at least 2 document win
291. s define the surface line through which the effective heat flux should be calculated You then have to define a third reference point which divides the surface line in two parts with different U values The surface line is defined by the input of the start and endpoints First click on the spot where the surface line should begin The boundaries of the construction which come into question for the surface line will be highlighted as a dashed line Move your mouse counterclockwise to the desired endpoint The dashed line now shows the segment through which the heat flux will be calculated As soon as you click on the endpoint the line will be defined If the SHIFT key is pressed while you define the surface line then the first click sets start and endpoints automatically at the adjacent adiabatic edges e g construction sections The Psi value will be displayed and the start and end points of the surface line will be by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools labeled If you want to interrupt the line input process then you can use context menu right click command Cancel or you can hit the ESC key You can change the reference lengths of the base constructions using the Scale Move Select tool or Edit tool respectively by moving the start end and reference point You can also change the text positions of the help objects of the U Values of the base construction and the dimension lines using
292. s of the legend are highlighted as well This setting group determines the properties of the label lines color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm Here you can determine how both ends of the lines should look like There are two drop down lists that show the different possibilities Here you can determine the line length as well as the bar width This group contains the settings for the background color of the legends and the styles of the border lines It also lets you hide and unhide the border lines Here you can define the size of the borders around the legend by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 203 Reference Font Tab 4 4 1 13 Dimension Style Description This style is applied when you work with the Dimension tool The dimension style consists of an automatically generated line combination which displays the distance between two points Dimension Style e General Font Name Dimension Numbers Thousands delimiter Show units Line Weight 0 200 Type End Point Markers Preview Digits 2 Color OO v Style iia 1000123 46 Decimal Points v Millimeter v Cancel Fields General Tab Name Digits Thousands delimiter 204 Here you define the name of the style You cannot leave this field empty the chosen name must be uniq
293. s the maximum number of iterations for the calculation of temperature dependent conductivities as well as the automatic mesh refinement 4 4 2 16 Results Description In the results dialog window the coloring of the temperature and heat flux density fields can be determined For both fields two settings are possible e Automatic e User defined b AMS B Application General User Interface Temperature Field Save Automatic Rase nes D User defined 20 000 Derived units Data Exchange 30 000 Tools Document 4 Same color for each 1 000 Celsius Model Special Materials Heat Flow Density Field Bahn 9 Automatic alculation Results User defined 0 000 Watt per square Current Page 20 000 a Grid and Guidelines Horizontal Guidelines E Same color for each 1 000 Vertical Guidelines OK Cancel Fields Automatic The colors will automatically be distributed according to the minimum and maximum values which appear in the construction User defined This option allows you to define the minimum and maximum values yourself i e to be able to compare temperature heat flux density field results across different variations Values greater than the by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 233 Reference maximum defined value will take on the color of the maximum value Values smaller than the minimum will take on the
294. size and have a critical material should automatically be assigned a by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows material according to certain standards The critical size and the standards can be determined separately For areas smaller than Critical size for a domain assigned a critical material which should be assigned another material All domains with an area less than this value are automatically assigned a material according to the current assignment standards With the material of Here you can choose the standards by which smaller domains the neighbor with with critical materials should be assigned a material The following criteria can be chosen greatest density the domain with the critical material takes on the material of the neighbor with the greatest density greatest area the domain with the critical material takes on the material of the neighbor with the greatest area greatest lambda the domain with the critical material takes on the material of the neighbor with the greatest thermal conductivity smallest lambda the domain with the critical material takes on the material of the neighbor with the smallest thermal conductivity Critical material color Color that domains with critical materials should be highlighted with 4 4 2 14 Cavities Description In this dialog window you can define the properties of air cavities according to EN ISO 10077 2 The use
295. sult symbols Show intermediate values Indicator Line Color o y Style jr Weight 0 200 El Millimeter hA Type v Weight 0 200 i Millimeter Type PP End Point Markers Begin Preview Marans Fon Margins AR Top 0000 0 000 Millimeter 0 000 Millimeter 0 000 Milimeter 202 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Fields General Tab Name Digits Thousands delimiter Show units Show result symbols Show intermediate values Line End Point Markers Extended Tab Size Background Border Tab Margins Here you define the name of the style You cannot leave this field empty the chosen name must be unique e not identical to another existing name Aside from these limitations you are free to choose any name Number of decimal places or significant digits which are to be displayed The kind Decimal Points or Significant you can select using the adjacent drop down list The digits left of the decimal point will be grouped into thousands The appropriate units will be shown after each numerical value The units can be adjusted in the Units tab of the Options dialog window The appropriate symbol dependent on what type of value will be displayed before each numerical value Is this option selected then intermediate value
296. t Point Result Object Tool Cavity Wizard B Document Model Special Materials Cavities Calculation gt Cancel Fields Activate Snap To Object Endpoint Middlepoint Intersection Extension Perpendicular Parallel Nearest Point 4 4 2 10 Result Object Tool Description If this option is selected then the mouse position will snap to selected characteristic points of a nearby object when you enter data Snaps to vertices and end points of edges of neighboring objects Snaps to middle points of edges of neighboring objects Snaps to intersections of edges of neighboring objects Snaps to extensions of edges of neighboring objects Snaps to perpendiculars to edges of neighboring objects Snaps to parallels of edges of neighboring objects Snaps to the nearest point of the edge of a neighboring object These settings determine the standard properties of the Result Object tool 224 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Options B Application General User Interface Save Database T emplates Basic Units Derived units 3 Data Exchange DXF Import SVG Import Export Tools General Object Capturing Result Object Tool Cavity Wizard B Document Model Special Materials Cavities Calculation 4 Show materials _ Show boundary conditions Show Surface Properties 4 Show material borders 4 Show labels Y Show Graphic Ob
297. t in the Result Object tool properties The styles can be also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 4 1 16 Temperature Tool Use Physics Limitations Description The Temperature tool lets you retrieve the local temperature at any given point ona calculated model It also lets you label these local temperatures The critical humidity point at which surface condensation forms and or at which the predefined surface humidity is reached along with the temperature factor the fRsi factor and the surface humidity at a given humidity are optionally calculated for points on the interior surface How do activate it The temperature tool can be activated with the menu command Temperature in the menu Results or by clicking on the amp icon in the Toolbox flyout by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 87 Reference 88 How do use it Moving the mouse cursor over a result object allows you to see the local temperature To add this local temperature to a report click on the desired location This will generate a label which you can move to a desired location by not releasing the mouse button see figure 1 If you would like to interrupt the process before a label is created you can do this with the ESC key The type of label e g number of decimal places the graphic properties of label lines as well as the optional p
298. t in the file Optionally you can pause the program after the mesh has been generated see corresponding Options dialog window which can be activated with the command Options in the menu Tools The progress of the calculation will be displayed in a corresponding dialog window Generates a mesh and calculates the temperature distribution of a construction selected from a list Optionally you can pause the program after the mesh has been generated see corresponding Options dialog window which can be activated with the command Options in the menu Tools The progress of the calculation will be displayed in a corresponding dialog window Undoes the last action The type of action will be added to this menu entry For example the entry says Undo Insert after an insert operation Repeats a command which has been undone The type of action will be added to this menu entry For example the entry says Redo Insert after an Undo insert command Cuts the currently selected object and puts it onto the clip by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 145 Reference Copy E Paste Paste Special Delete Select Adjust Parameter Layer Object 3D equivalent Object Graphic Object Properties 146 board Copies the currently selected object and puts the copy onto the clip board Inserts contents of the clipboard into the active document Inserts the contents of the clip
299. t menu The dialog window corresponds to a standard windows open file dialog window except for the few points explained below by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 257 Reference r y Open Look in Tutorials 070 T Name s Date taken Tags Size A Z logo_DE tif 3 KB Recent Places logo_EN gif 2KB Desktop V Preview walter schmidli A Computer AL a Network m j File name logo _EN gif 7 Open Files of type Al supported formats x Cancel Fields File Name Name of the file picture you wish to add Files of type Filter for the various picture files Only those files that correspond to the file type selected here will be shown Preview If this option is selected then a preview will be displayed 4 4 5 14 Page Setup Description This dialog window is opened with menu command Page Setup from the File menu The dialog window corresponds to a standard windows page setup dialog window 258 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Page Setup Lel ws J Paper Source Automatically Select zu Orientation Margins millimeters Portrait Left 0 Right 0 Landscape Top 0 Bottom 0 Apply to Whole document Z OK Cancel 4 4 5 15 Print Description This dialog window is opened with menu command Print From the File menu The dialog window corresponds to a standard wi
300. tab context menu New report pages are created with the context menu command Insert New Page and existing report pages are deleted with the context menu command Delete Page e The results are displayed with help of result objects With 2 clicks of the Result Object tool gr a rectangular place holder is created which is replaced by the actual construction after the calculation The corner points are captured ifthe snap functions are active Grid RE Guidelines Br and Object Id see menu Arrange e For every result object different properties can be determined which should be displayed The Result Properties dialog window can either be activated with the context 50 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Document Templates menu command Properties with the menu command Edit Properties or by double clicking on the result object Individual properties can also be activated or deactivated directly in the result object context menu or in the Results menu of the selected result object Alternatively you can adjust easily all result object properties in the Properties flyout O continue the tutorial you can click here or use the navigation buttons on the top 3 6 3 Setting Standard Properties All settings which are defined in the Options dialog window of the category document are saved in the document template and are therefore automatically assumed by the document based on this template Click on the arr
301. tential mildew problem as well as the room humidity can be adjusted in the Properties flyout by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools Ss min 2 90 C t 0 512 an 100 9 32 26 8i aug 12 09 C Figure 3 O The Min Max Temperature tool can only be used on report pages and only if a calculated model result object is present The start and endpoints of the border line or the surface must be on the surface of the construction The start and endpoints of the border line or the surface line must be able to be joined by a line The critical room humidities and the surface humidity are only shown if the minimum temperature point is on a boundary segment with a temperature h value boundary condition and the minimum temperature is lower than the adjacent room temperature The temperature factor fRsi is only shown if there are exactly two boundary conditions in the model and the minimum temperature is lower than the adjacent room temperature The temperature factor fRsi is shown if there are more than two boundary conditions in the model and the minimum temperature is lower than the adjacent room temperature In general the temperature factor fRsi cannot be used for other boundary condition temperatures by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 95 Reference 4 1 18 Heat Flux Density Tool Use Limitations Description The Heat
302. terial by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Logical Operations of the domain that was first selected Figure 1 Before the unification Figure 2 After the unification of the two objects Process e Activate the Select Move Scale tool and select the domains that you would like to unify e Choose the command Unite from the Arrange menu or click on the al icon which is located on the Arrange toolbar Sos as 3 4 Led 440 41 6544 45 S ll at 41 Figure 3 Arrange toolbar 4 5 2 Intersection of Objects Description The Intersection operation lets you determine which part of a selected material domain you would like to cut The result of the operation is the creation of a domain which is composed out of that area where all involved domains overlap Similar to the Unification of Objects operation this operation can create a domain out of several independent domains belonging to the same object If the objects have different materials then the result object assumes the properties of the object that was first selected A Figure 1 Before Figure 2 After Intersection of the two objects by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 291 Reference Process e Activate the Select Move Scale tool and mark the domain you would like to cut e Choose the Intersect command from the Arrange menu or click on the ra icon which is located on the Arrange
303. the Polyline tool properties see figure 1 The list shows all styles for dimension line objects that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new Polyline object will always be created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles flyout or in the Style drop down list in the Polyline tool properties The styles can also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 Position x 10 000 mm y 20d Close Create Cancel Properties Input o Absolute Relative Coordinates O Cartesian Polar Style Red black bordered x Figure 1 4 1 26 Rectangle Tool Use Description With the Rectangle tool you can create rectangles on report pages How do activate it The Rectangle tool can be activated with the command Rectangle in the menu Insert or by clicking on the A icon in the Toolbox flyout When this tool is activated the mouse becomes I al 140 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools How do use it The rectangle tool is similar to the Rectangular Domain tool with a few exceptions e The Rectangle tool does not create material domains e The style of the drawn rectangle can be defined with the corresponding Styles in the Styles flyout Defining Styles The presentation of a rectangle object can be
304. the Temperature tool properties The styles can also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 Properties Style Temperatures ans Figure 3 Temperature tool properties by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 89 Reference 90 Physical Explanation For temperature points on the interior surface an additional temperature factor the surface humidity and two critical room humidities can be displayed see figure 1 Temperature factor fRsi is calculated according to the following formula 8 min 8 Rsi 8 u 8 And the temperature factor fRsi for problems with more than 2 boundary condition temperatures is calculated according to the following formula Gin T 8 8 min where Osi min surface temperature C Bi interior boundary condition temperature C de exterior boundary condition temperature C Be min lowest exterior boundary condition temperature C The external temperature on which the calculation of the temperature factor fRsi is based can be adjusted in the Properties Flyout cf Figure 2 Surface humidity osi This is the humidity on the surface of the temperature point for the room humidity given in the parentheses The room humidity of the bordering room is defined in the Properties flyout The surface humidity depends on the selected interior temperature and r
305. the Zoom toolbar cf figure 1 respectively at the bottom of the application window cf figure 2 The entire page of the report will be shown at maximum magnification only available on report pages Zoom Page Width This command can be activated by clicking on the A icon on the Zoom toolbar cf figure 1 respectively at the bottom of the application window cf figure 2 The entire width of the report will be shown at maximum magnification only available on report pages Zoom Page Height This command can be activated by clicking on the ER icon on the Zoom toolbar cf figure 1 respectively at the bottom of the application window cf figure 2 The entire height of the report will be shown at maximum magnification only available on report pages Analog to other commands zoom commands can also be undone or redone by clicking on the and icons Q Q 400 ida x Ar 41 Figure 1 Zoom toolbar ad QA 49 92 Figure 2 Zoom possibilities at the bottom of the application window by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 71 Reference 72 Rectangular Domain Tool Use Description The Rectangular Domain tool allows you to create rectangular and square material domains How do activate it The Rectangular Domain tool can be activated with the command Rectangular Domain in the menu Insert or by clicking on the O icon in the Toolbox flyout When the tool is active I the m
306. the unbe line When you reach this point with the mouse the cursor should become a 1 e Choose the command Close from the context menu right click If you want to remove a point you have just defined choose the command Remove Previous from the context menu right click To interrupt the entire domain entry process you can either choose Cancel from the context menu right click or you can hit the ESC key If while you are drawing you additionally press the Shift key then the entry will be limited to the multiple of an element angle First release the mouse button and then the Shift key The element angle can be defined in the Option dialog window Application gt Tools gt General Keyboard After you have activated the Polygon Domain tool make sure that the Polygon Domain tool properties are visible If they are not visible you can activate them with menu command View Toolbox Hit the Tab key or click on the first field of the tool properties You can activate the individual fields by repeatedly hitting the Tab key or by using the Tab key while the Shift key is held down Now you can enter the numerical coordinates of the first and subsequent points For the by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 75 Reference 76 numerical input you can choose several different types of coordinates e absolute cartesian You enter the x and y coordinates of the point e absolute polar You enter the ang
307. ting name Aside from these limitations you are free to choose any name Number of decimal places or significant digits which are to be displayed The kind Decimal Points or Significant you can select using the adjacent drop down list The digits left of the decimal point will be grouped into thousands The appropriate units will be shown after each numerical value The units can be adjusted in the Units tab of the Options dialog window The appropriate symbol dependent on the type of value will be shown before each numerical value Here you determine whether the label line should be a simple or an orthogonal right angle bent line This setting group determines the properties of label lines color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm Here you can define how both ends of the label line should look like There are two drop down lists that show the different possibilities This setting group determines the properties of the section lines color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm Here you can define how the ends of the section line segment lines should look like There are two drop down lists that show the different possibilities The same style is used for both ends of the line segment When this option is active then the U value calculation is by infomind gmbh webers
308. tion is activated the surface humidity for surface points is shown additionally At least one option of the group Shown Properties has to be selected If this option is activated the room humidity for condensation for surface points is shown additionally At least one option of the group Shown Properties has to be selected If this option is activated the room humidity for moisture for surface points is shown additionally At least one option of the group Shown Properties has to be selected 181 Reference 4 4 1 3 Min Max Temperature Style Description This style is used when you are working with the Min Max Temperature tool Min Max Temperature Style LY eS Min Max Temperature Style EA General Extended Font General Extended Font Name Min Max T t ee ame In ax emperatures El Temperaire Maa temp ente Numbers Y FRSi Value Average temperature Di a F Thousands delimiter 7 Room humidity for condensation 41 Show units Y Room humidity for moisture Show result symbols Y Condensation zone Indicator EF hans V Moisture zone Line Line properties Cor D c Type v Weight 0 200 Millimeter v End Point Markers Type v Begin v End v Preview Preview Omax 20 02 C 8max 20 0 C 06 Cancel ok Cancel Fields General Tab Name Here you define the name of the style You
309. tion of the start and endpoints The heat flux value is positive if it flows into the observed system and negative if it flows out of the system The unit W m indicates Watts per linear meter constructional element perpendicular to the section The style of the label e g the number of post decimal place holders critical surface humidity as well as the graphical properties of the surface line can be changed by adjusting the corresponding Style in the Styles flyout 98 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools Figure 1 Beside the resulting heat flux through the surface polyline you find additionally the true length of the polyline in the Properties flyout cf figure 2 Properties AX SES Selected Object Name Style heat flux 3 e Results Heat Flux W m 19 60295 True length mm 1204 338 Dimension Reference Point x mm 39 773 y mm 82 136 Width mm Height mm 136 796 Figure 2 Properties flyout of a heat flux object Defining Styles The presentation of a heat flux object can be defined in the Style list in the Heat Flux tool properties see figure 3 The list shows all styles for heat flux objects that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new heat flux object will always be created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles flyout or in the Style
310. tion of the temperature dependent conductivities equation solver and automatic mesh refinement Current number of iterations for the calculation for the calculation of the temperature dependent conductivities by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 269 Reference equation solver and automatic mesh refinement Max rel quotient The calculation of the temperature dependent conductivities will be carried out until the relative quotient of the conductivity of all domains with temperature dependent conductivities is smaller than the maximum tolerated relative quotient or until the maximum number of iterations has been reached Max rel error Maximum relative error of a solution vector The resulting equation system will be solved iteratively until the relative error is less than this value or the maximum number of iterations has been reached Current rel error Current relative error of the solution vector Max rel flux balance Maximum relative error of the heat flux balance The heat flux error is the ratio of the sum of all signed heat fluxes and half of the sum of absolute values of the heat fluxes Current rel flux balance Current relative error of the heat flux balance Stop Stops the calculation After stopping the button caption changes to OK OK Closes the dialog window Before closing the status of the calculation can be seen in the Status field lt lt Overview Hides the calcul
311. tions Description The Cut tool lets you cut domains along a straight line or a closed polygon 66 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools How do activate it The Cut tool can be activated with the command Cut in the menu Tools or by clicking on the B icon in the Toolbox flyout When the tool is active the mouse becomes a How do use it Cutting is done in two steps e Defining of a cutting line e Actual cutting Areas can either be cut along a straight line or along a closed polygon Figure 1 for example demonstrates the cutting of a corner of a rectangle The form of the cutting line can be defined in the Properties toolbar see Input figure 2 If the option Only selected objects cf figure 2 is checked only the selected objects will be considered else all objects Mouse The entry of a closed polygon see Input Polygon as a cutting line with the mouse is done in a similar way to using the Polygon Domain tool To remove the previous point choose the command Remove Previous from the context menu that appears with a right click To cancel the entire process you can either choose the command Cancel from the context menu right click or you can hit the Esc key You can then cut the domain using the Cut command from the context menu right click The entry of a line see Input Line as a cutting line is done by determining two reference points on the line With the fi
312. tm Eine A A ters 274 Layer Material Assignment 2 2 a s een ta 274 3D equivalent Object A hihi hl 276 IMporting CGORSTTUCIONS snesu nn aene SEN A idea 277 Exporting Picture S na nen Ad OA E sh 278 Materials and Boundary Conditions ccccccceeeeeeeenceeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeees 278 Protect Object t au iad AAS ano A eet A A be ie dee he teal 279 Protect Reporma ne eE Ea Ne ad EEA EEA AEAEE A APA Ad ea 280 Protect DIC de AAN ES 282 Layer Object A ete A taa Glass Unit Object tu Hr es habe il hei Various Warmings za rear AA AA erden nern ier 5 Logical Operations Unification of Objects Intersection of Objects A A 291 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Table of Contents SUDIFACtON OF ODJEC sS iii ti erduehatcues sveresszaned 292 A A O 293 Glossa iii Ir alien 293 Index 297 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 7 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Part by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch New 1 New 1 1 What s new in version 7 Below a selection of the new features and improvements of the flixo pro version 7 Model and Results Multiple model pages and multiple master pages per document see context menu in the lower tabs Frame U Value and Joint U Value can be calculated either automatical
313. to continue with the tutorial by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 45 Tutorials 3 5 2 Psi Value 3 Constructions Psi Values with 3 Components are usefully calculated for constructions where 3 components are connected sequentially Either the same junction construction is used twice e g 2 identical thermal bridges between a mullion and the glazing or one junction between 2 components is thermal bridge free e g window with panel instead of glazing Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 5 Summary e APsi value with 3 components is defined using the Psi Value tool 3 Components by applying 4 mouse clicks The first two points define the surface line through which the effective heat flux should be calculated The third and fourth point reference points divide the surface into 3 parts with different U values The points are captured if the snap functions are active Grid H Guidelines Hr and Objects ta cf menu Arrange The type of the Psi value has to be adjusted in the Properties flyout The Psi value type is either twice the same junction construction this means both has the same Psi value or 1 junction with Psi value and the second junction without Psi value e The U value of the middle component has to be entered in the Properties flyout You can enter the U value either directly using the keyboard or using the Pa tool by clicking on the U value of another file
314. tomatically in those areas where the relative error of the current solution is greater than a critical limit The mesh refinement will continue as long as the relative error at any point is larger than this critical value or the maximum number of runs is reached The termination criteria for the solver The Relative Error refers to the calculated temperatures and the Heat Flux Error refers to the heat flux Either only a single criterion or a combination of both criteria can be used Determines the maximum relative error of the solution vector If this method is selected the resulting system equation will be solved iteratively until the relative error is less than this value or until the maximum number of iterations has been reached Determines the maximum heat flux error according to standard EN ISO 10077 2 see above If this method is selected the resulting system equation will be solved iteratively until the relative heat flux error is less than this value or until the maximum number of iterations has been reached The calculation of temperature dependent conductivity values will continue until either the relative change of the conductivity by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows value of all domains with temperature dependent conductivities are smaller than the maximal tolerated relative change or the maximum number of iterations has been reached Max No iterations Determine
315. tool kind Parallel Layers allows you to prompt the U value for any given construction section and creates a label of that value in the diagram by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 101 Reference How do activate it The U Value tool can be activated with the command U Value in the menu Results or by clicking on the HF icon in the Toolbox flyout Then select Parallel Layers as kind in the tool I properties cf figure 2 When the tool is active the mouse becomes a in the area of the construction How do use it With a first click the point where the cross section line should be is defined The direction of the cross section line should be perpendicular to the nearest edge If the mouse button is held down a dashed preview appears as well as the label which can be placed accordingly You can define the ultimate position of the label by releasing the mouse button see figure 1 If you would like to interrupt the entry then hit the ESC key With the Select Move Scale tool or Edit tool respectively you can change the position of the label along with the position of the cross section line for which the U value should be calculated The style of the label e g the number of post decimal place holders along with the graphical properties of the cross section line can be adjusted with the corresponding styles in the Styles flyout 2 U 0 204Wwim K Figure 1 If the U value should b
316. trasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows conditions done with the user defined boundary condition and not with the boundary condition defined in the object The chosen boundary condition is shown on the U value object he Here you define the exterior heat transfer coefficient for the calculation of the U value if you are not going to use the value already defined in the object hi Here you define the interior heat transfer coefficient for the calculation of the U value if you are not going to use the value already defined in the object Font Tab 4 4 1 9 U Value extended Style Description This style is used when you let flixo pro calculate a frame U value a joint U value or an equivalent U value and display the results In tutorial 4 frame U value calculation is described and in tutorial 5 joint U value and equivalent are described ca x U Value extended Style General Font Name Numbers Digits y Decimal Points V Thousands delimiter 4 Show units Result 4 Show symbolic formula Y Show intermediate values Help Objects 4 Show help objects Heat flux Style Edit style Choose style U value style Edit style Choose style Dimension style Edit style Choose style Preview o 9 463 ss Ub 0 190 1 031 vu 21 _ 20 000 E 5 7 0 154 ia Cancel by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infom
317. tric information is saved without units For drawings which are not scaled 1 unit represents 1 millimeter in Europe In scaled drawings the units can be adjusted respectively i e in the scale 1 1000 1 unit represents 1 meter Determines whether all DXF object points end and midpoints should automatically be mapped on a grid Sets the distance of the squares within the grid on which all end and midpoints of the DXF object should be mapped Upon importing a DXF file arcs and circles are divided into individual segments You can determine the accuracy of the approximation by adjusting the radius and the number of points for the polygon approximation of a circle All circles with radii smaller than the reference circle s radius will be subdivided proportionally to radius less than the reference circle All circles with radii bigger than the reference circle s radius will be subdivided 219 Reference 220 Minimum number of edges for an arc Assign material Use Layout data Don t import turned off layers Use only shady drawn edges proportionally to radius more than the reference circle This setting determines the minimum number of edges for arc approximation Determines an internal calculation for the number of edges of a specific arc taking into account the Reference circle radius which according to the polygon circular approximation would have fewer edges than this parameter value If
318. truction is more complex and is entered on multiple layers or if it needs to be defined with previously designed elements it would best you get to know the Layers flyout and Component flyout before hand For acomplete definition of the construction you must enter the materials and boundary conditions The materials assignment can be done with the Assign Properties tool or with the Boundary Condition tool Alternatively materials and boundary conditions can be assigned by dragging them from the materials database or table or respectively from the boundary conditions database or table A step by step explanation of these techniques can be found in tutorial 1 and tutorial 2 and the import of CAD product constructions can be found in tutorial 3 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Calculate 2 5 Calculate Inthe menu Tools Options and in the category Document gt Calculate the settings of the calculation parameters can be adjusted Subsequently the calculation of the temperature distribution in the construction can be started with the menu command File Calculate Model calculation is explained in tutorial 1 The progress of the computational process is displayed in a Status window in which the calculation can also be interrupted After ending the process the window has to be closed depending on the general program settings cf menu Tools Options category Application gt General by clicking on
319. ts are drawn Break after automatic material Determines whether a break after the automatic assignment material assignment should be inserted If this option is marked and a material was automatically assigned then the calculation must be restarted By activating Zoom to next Conflict the domains with automatic assigned materials are displayed successively Break after mesh generation Determines whether a break should be inserted after the calculation of the result of the mesh generation If this option is marked you have the explicit option to start or not start the calculation Break after the calculation Determines whether a break after the successful calculation of the result should be inserted If this option is marked the calculation dialog is active until you click on the OK button Switch automatically to Determines whether there should be an automatic 1st report page after calculation switch to the first report page after a successful calculation If this option is marked then the switch takes place after the calculation dialog is closed If it is not marked then the model page remains active Automatic recalculation Determines whether all secondary results after the recalculation of a construction should be refreshed If this option is not marked then the recalculation of all results can be started with the command Refresh from the Results menu 4 4 2 3 Save Description In the Save options dialog window the save s
320. ts for the calculation are emphasized 3 1 Basic Techniques In this introductory tutorial you will create a simple flixO pro document directly within the flixo pro editor to analyze a ceiling wall junction First you will define the necessary settings next enter the geometry of the model Then you will define the materials and the boundary conditions Lastly you will start calculating the thermal characteristics and then display the results in a report Figure 1 Model of a ceiling cavity wall junction Content Defining Program and Document Settings Entering Model Geometry Defining Materials Defining Boundary Conditions by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 25 Tutorials Running a Calculation and Displaying the Results in a Report Start flixo pro if you have not already done so and begin by defining the Program and Document Settings 3 1 1 Defining Program and Document Settings Before you enter the geometry of the model you should define the basic and derived units of measurement you would like to use as well as the width of the grid Click on the arrows in the graphic below to navigate in tutorial 1 Summary e The options of the program or of a document can be set in several dialog windows You can define the parameters which are relevant for the input visualization and calculation in the Options dialog window You can open the options dialog window by the command Option
321. ts subdirectories are shown You can change the template file path in the Save Options dialog window menu command Tools Options New General ae Preview Master Report 10 10 10 Documento Empty iftFEM_Sch vuoto Template 10 10 10 iftFEM_Sch Leere Yorlage Mod le vid io lO io Normal_DE Blank Normal_FF 4 gt E IE Document Create new Document gt Template 4 m canca Fields Preview You can get a preview of all report pages By clicking on the 4 button the previous report is shown By clicking on the button the next report will be shown By clicking on the a icon the current preview will be enlarged By clicking on the a icon the current preview will be reduced By clicking on the icon the entire report will be shown You can also magnify individual regions of a report by dragging a rectangle around the area you would like to magnify Document When you choose this option a new document based on the selected template in the list will be created Template When you choose this option a new document template based on the selected template in the list will be created by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 255 Reference Cancel Cancels the action a new document will not be created 4 4 5 12 Document Template Description The Document Template dialog window can be activated by using the command Template from the Fi
322. ture object Defining Styles The presentation of a Min Max Temperature object can be defined in the Style list of the Min Max Temperature tool properties see figure 2 The list shows all styles for Min Max Temperature objects that have previously been determined in the Styles flyout A new Min Max Temperature object will always be created with the styles currently marked in the Style drop down list You can either change the selection of the styles in the Styles flyout or in the Style drop down list from the Min Max Temperature tool properties The styles can be also be adjusted afterwards by using the Assign Properties tool or by using the Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 Properties Sye a by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 93 Reference 94 Figure 2 Min Max Temperature tool properties Physical Explanation In addition to the minimum temperature the temperature factor the surface humidity and the two critical room humidities can be displayed cf figure 3 Temperature factor fRsi is calculated according to the following formula 8 min 8 ln 8 8 And the temperature factor fRsi for problems with more than 2 boundary condition temperatures is calculated according to the following formula ER 8 an Gg where Osi min calculated minimum surface temperature according to the defined surface line segment C Bi interior boundary condition temperatur
323. ue i e not identical to another existing name Aside from these limitations you are free to choose any name Number of decimal places or significant digits which are to be displayed The kind Decimal Points or Significant you can select using the adjacent drop down list The digits left ofthe decimal point will be grouped into thousands by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Show units Show result symbols Line End Point Markers Font Tab 4 4 1 14 Information Style Description The appropriate units will be shown after each numerical value The units can be adjusted in the Units tab of the Options dialog window The appropriate symbol dependent on what type of value will be displayed before each numerical value This setting group determines the properties of the dimension lines color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm Here you can determine how the ends of distance lines should look like There is a drop down lists that shows the different possibilities The same style is used for both ends of a distance line This style is applied when you are working with the Information tool The Information style consists of a label line and a text box which can contain various definable information by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 205 Reference
324. ulated from examples with parallel layers e g like in figure 1 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 103 Reference Physical Explanation The U value of a construction cross section of a layered component is calculated according to the following formula l ee 1 SL FL a J where U U Value W m2K h interior heat transfer coefficient W m2K dj thickness of layer j m A thermal conductivity of the layer j W mK h exterior heat transfer coefficient W m2K Comments e The measurement dj is based on the cross section line e Arequirement is that all the layer boundaries are parallel and perpendicular to the cross section line as in figure 4 The calculation of the U value therefore only makes sense in the boundary areas and in the middle of this construction h z U 0 755WimK he Figure 4 O e This tool can only be used on the report page and only if result objects of a previously calculated model are present 104 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools 4 1 20 2 Equivalent U Value Use Physics Limitations Description The U Value tool Equivalent U Value allows you to calculate and display equivalent U values The equivalent U value takes periodic thermal bridge occurrences into account e g the joist in figure 2 How do activate it The U Value tool can be activated with the command U Value in the menu Results
325. unique i e not identical to another existing name Aside from these limitations you are free to choose any name Number of decimal places or significant digits which are to be displayed The kind Decimal Points or Significant you can select using the adjacent drop down list The digits left of the decimal point will be grouped into thousands The appropriate units will be shown after each numerical value The units can be adjusted in the Units tab of the Options dialog window The appropriate symbol dependent on the type of value will be displayed before each numerical value Here you determine whether the label line should be a simple or an orthogonal right angle bent line by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Line End Point Markers Extended Tab Line Font Tab 4 4 1 7 Streamline Style Description This setting group determines the properties of the label lines color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm Here you can determine how both ends of the label line should look like There are two drop down lists that show the different possibilities This setting group determines the characteristics of the object edge lines color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm This style is used when streamlines are displ
326. upport the ESC button similar to AutoCAD Advanced object capturing features Materials and boundary conditions used in the document are highlighted The order of the components in the properties of the PSI value with 3 components has been adapted the components are listed counter clockwise On the model pages the edit tool and the select move scale tool are two separate tools on the report page the two tools can be grouped together flixo pro can be used with different profiles The default template and inactive tools can be set per profile Miscellaneous 10 Many new field functions reference to a calculated result Relative Heat Flux Error Sum of absolute Heat Flux Current Program Version Program Version Document EN ISO by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch What s new in version 7 10077 2 Version Emissivities are listed in the boundary condition and material tables if flixo pro calculates them The external temperature can be adjusted in the fRSi calculation Database Materials Boundary conditions Components are split in user defined parts and parts which are maintained by infomind or third party The non user defined database can be updated over the Internet Materials of www baubook at are integrated into flixo pro Non empty database sections can be deleted too Various settings of the dialogs are proposed as default when you next open the dialog Parameter objects can contain
327. using the by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 123 Reference Drag amp Drop function see tutorial 1 Properties Kind 2 Constructions x Style Psivalue extended y Figure 2 Psi Value tool properties Ace Results To receive accurate results the following conditions must be met e the cross section line should be defined within sections through which no heat flux flows e g symmetrical axes or on edges where there the boundary condition is set at heat flux density q 0 0 W m2K e lfyou choose an exterior reference system start and endpoints should lie on the exterior boundary of the construction If you choose an interior reference system start and endpoints should lie on the interior boundary of the construction Make note of the order of the inputs also here endpoint inputs are entered counterclockwise e Also consider the Comments section in the chapter Physical Explanation The type of label e g number of post decimal place holders as well as the graphical properties of the cross section line can be adjusted with the corresponding styles in the Styles flyout A u 2 Y 7 U 0 24 Wi m K U 0 70 Wim K 216 00 525 00 gt 20 000 gt Yu 7 U b Urb 0 700 0 216 0 238 0 525 0 186 W m K Figure 3 124 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch
328. utorial 3 and in Tutorial 4 Percent Submenu with predefined zoom factors 4 2 4 Insert menu G Polygon Domain Activates the Polygon Domain tool 150 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Menu Commands o Elliptical Domain O Rectangular Domain gt Boundary Condition Heat Source R Air Cavity EN ISO 10077 2 TS Dimension Information Line E Polyline o Rectangle o Ellipse A Text Picture Field Layer Object Glas Unit Object Activates the Elliptical Domain tool Activates the Rectangular Domain tool Activates the Boundary Condition tool Activates the Heat Source tool Activates the Air Cavity EN ISO 10077 2 Wizard Activates the Dimension tool Activates the Information tool Activates the Line tool Activates the Polyline tool Activates the Rectangle tool Activates the Ellipse tool Activates the Text tool Inserts a saved picture into the current document The file name and the data type must be entered into the corresponding File dialog window The position of the picture is determined by the upper left hand corner of the picture the position of this corner can be defined with a mouse click Inserts a field object into the current document The type of field and its options must be defined in the Field dialog window that appears The position of the upper left corner can be determined with a mouse click Inserts a layered parametric
329. w is opened where a new database can be defined This setting is dependent on the User Interface language Opens a dialog window to check if more recent database from infomind or third party exist Backs up all database and templates in a selectable folder The unit settings can be found in two different options dialog windows Basic Units and Derived Units For each unit system the units for inputs and outputs can be defined If a unit is changed this does not influence the calculation or presentation of the results by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 217 Reference Options B Application General User Interface Save Database T emplates Data Exchange E Tools 6 Document i Model Special Materials Cavities 5 Current Page Basic Units Length Time Angle Power Mass Energy Temperature Options lication E App H Data Exchange i E Tools E Document Special Materials Cavities Calculation i Results H Current Page Derived units Area Volume Density Heat Flux Heat Flux Density Convection Heat Transfer Thermal Capacity Thermal Conductivity Vapor Conductivity LP X quare milimeter Cubic meter Kilogram per cubic meter Watt per meter Watt per square meter Watt
330. which can be adjusted rather than redrawn Proof Mode In proof mode all properties of the defined material domains and objects are shown Shift Key The shift key switches from lower case letters to upper case letters as long as the key is held down Snap to Snap to lets you move objects freely with the mouse but the reference point will snap to objects guidelines or grid points Moved objects will always snap to the point which is nearest when the mouse button is released The snap to settings determine where the object will actually snap to Streamlines These are lines where heat conducts through the construction Between 2 adjacent streamlines flows the same amount of energy A greater density of streamlines in a construction indicates an areas of high energy conduction Tab Key The tabulator key is often used to change foci within the program Tool tip Tool tips are small text boxes that appear when the mouse hovers over a command button or area that has a tool tip by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 295 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Index Index 22 2 Constructions 45 ge 3 Constructions 46 3D Object 149 276 A About flixo 157 Absolute Coordinates 75 Absorption 81 Accurate Results 121 122 126 131 Activate Boundary Condition Legend 155 False Coloring 155 Isotherms 155 MaterialLegend 155 Stream Density Field 155
331. with the Crop tool in order to display for example only the critical domain by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 19 Use The choice of the visible object properties can be done using the Properties Flyout the context menu right click the Results menu or with the Results Object properties dialog window which can be activated by double clicking on the result object Aside from the object properties you can calculate and display different results with the results tools of Temperature tool E Min Max Temperature tool H Heat Flux Density tool e I Heat flux tool HE U Value tool Parallel Layers Equivalent U Value Frame Uf Value UTJ Joint Roller Shutter Box U Value e Y psi Value tool 2 Components 3 Components Edge Spacer You can activate the results tools from the Toolbox flyout or through the Results menu To display additional information and to prepare and arrange reports the following tools are at your disposal fa Dimension tool e 1 Information tool Line tool eG Polyline tool 00 Rectangle tool 02 Ellipse tool e A Text tool Activating the arrangement tools can either be done from the Toolbox flyout or via the Insert menu With the menu command Insert Picture you can insert pictures into the report With the menu command Insert Field you can insert fields for page numbers current saved date etc which will be automatically refreshed With the me
332. y Tools for editing objects and changing views 2 E E A Assign Properties E Slightly ventilated air cavi ightly ity A Cut Pi Measure Distance Fly Dut Domain with a Zo L Material Database 2 9 Materials 4 Objects Boundary Conditions Layers Styles Components Documents EE EN ISO 10456 6 Asphalt 5 22 Bitumen A Bitumen pure 1 LY Bitumen felt sheet J Concrete a Floor coverings O Rectangular Domain a Elliptical Domain Tools for generating new E objects C4 Polygon Domain ik Air Cavity EN ISO 10077 2 Boundary Condition Heat Source Shows properties of a selected tool or a selected object Fly Dut Domain with the properties of the selected S 8 Reference Point materials boundary conditions TR t eport Pages used to display and edit the results of Ei por ter gt u e 8 E El EE calculated constructions Position and Dimension a x Y x y Name Bitumen pure 1 Jg 4 4 gt _ Model Master Report Input Temperatures Miscell w i Color 108 225 y Context Help Type Normal ba Mota Seda Lambda W m K 0 170 a Click on an object it geh an Fly Out Domain with Scale ameer 0 The start point of the rubber band rectangle can be inside a context sensitive help text hi a t Rho kg m3 1050 000 Move Dragging with pressed mouse button SHIFT Moves only verti for the active Al S
333. y infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 61 Reference the Apply button or by activating it with the Tab key and then hitting Return If the option Create Copy is activated a duplicate will automatically be created All coordinates correspond to the current coordinate system The origin of the coordinate system can easily be adjusted Reference Point hor Left x ver Top Z Position and Dimension 715 772 mm 443 230 mm w 41 402 mm h 32 512 mm Scale hor 100 Lock aspect ver 100 Create Copy Apply Cancel Properties Figure 3 Select Move Scale tool properties 4 1 2 Edit Tool Use Limitations Description The Edit tool lets you move corner points of existing objects add new corner points or remove corner points If the object in question is a parametric object then the Edit tool can adjust the edge length of this object How do activate it The Edit tool can be activated with the command Edit from the menu Tools or by clicking on the symbol on the Toolbox flyout When this tool is active the mouse becomes an arrow 62 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools How do use it Mouse After you have activated the Edit tool click on the domain that you would like to change to select it you can also select it with the Select Move Scale Tool Now click on the corner point that you would like to move The poi
334. y is already covered by thermal bridge energy losses by flat roof and wall measurements YP values can also be negative The calculation of Y values is explained in detail in tutorial 5 How do activate it The Psi Value tool can be activated with the menu command Psi Value in the menu Results or by clicking on the Y iconinthe Toolbox flyout Then select the kind Edge Spacer in the tool properties cf figure 2 How do i use it First select the result object for which the spacer Psi value should be calculated Second you by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 131 Reference have to define in the dialog window the file with the Uf value of the same frame If you want to calculate the spacer Psi value according to EN ISO 10077 2 using this tool following preconditions have to be fulfilled see Limitations e The Uf value of teh frame is already calculated and saved in a file e The frame matches exactly with the one of the Uf value calculation e The orientation of the frame matches exactly with the one of the Uf value calculation e Materials which define the frame dimensions on the Uf value calculation are not used in other parts than the frame e g aluminium If necessary you have to create duplicates of materials e g aluminium frame and aluminium panel If these conditions are not fulfilled you can calculate the spacer Psi value using the Psi value tool kind 2 Constructions respect
335. y materials one for the unventilated and one for the slightly ventilated air cavities The names of these materials are defined in the Options dialog 78 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tools window Application gt Tools gt Cavity Wizard If these materials do not exist in the document or the material type does not correspond while defining the start point you will be prompted with an Air Cavity Material dialog window to either choose existing air cavity material s from the Document Materials table or to create new air cavity material s Optionally you have the possibility to define small domains which often arise as a consequence of drawing impressions as critical material see Special Materials Options dialog window instead of being defined as cavity material These layers will then automatically be assigned with the material of a particular neighbor Assigning Surface Properties Activate the Cavity Wizard and click into the cavity to whose surfaces you want to assign automatically the emissivities based on the neighboring materials and the material surface properties table The assignment takes place according to the present settings in the material surface properties table cf figure 1 Picture 4 Air Cavity with automatically assigned surface properties 4 radiation boundary condition points 1 e The wizard polygon domain must have at least three corner points
336. y this hatch and the color in the construction You can only adjust the hatch if this is a new air cavity material You can only adjust the hatch if this is a new air cavity material 61 62 Long wave length emission properties of the two surfaces in the direction of the heat flux E a q 22 You can only adjust these values if a new air cavity material is present and the emission properties are not calculated by flixo pro cf option dialog window document cavities Unventilated Determines whether the air cavity is ventilated or not According to EN 10077 2 air cavities are unventilated when they are completely surrounded surrounded by material with exterior exposure of less than 2mm According to EN 10077 2 air cavities are ventilated when they have exposure greater or equal to 2mm but less than 10mm If the air cavity is greater than this value then a boundary condition must be set and the air cavity cannot be assigned a material These options cannot be adjusted Description Additional comments You can only modify the description if you are creating a new air cavity material 4 4 5 20 New Component Description In the New Component dialog window names and file paths of the component can be defined This dialog window can be activated from the Components flyout This dialog window is used for both new components components from a current selection and for saved components In tutorial 2 new component
337. yer Description The Layers flyout lets you manipulate the layers Here you can add layers change their properties and delete them The list shows all layers of the current page with a preview of the active layer focus layer Material domains and other objects can be placed on the different layers and they can selectively be made visible printable or editable For each layer you can define the properties for example the visibility of the layer Some layers are predefined for every document the so called system layers these layers have special properties layers for guidelines and grid Layers y AX Y xau Y Y Ea Name ar Model Layer MOM omc Layer 0 MEA Guidelines Mo A Grid Bon 4 Im b BL EG M C Bc g C BAS by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch 159 Reference 160 Focus Layer Many operations which you can carry out in the individual model and report pages work in conjunction with the active layers or focus layers The focus layer is marked in the list and its name is highlighted in bold In the preview window all elements of the focus layer are displayed either in an expanded or draft mode Properties and their Symbols The symbols for the properties of the layers are located on top of the list A check mark next to the layer name means that this property is activated o Displays the visibility of the layer 3 Shows whether the layer w
338. you can define the horizontal and vertical 178 alignment of the results within the result object area by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Dialog Windows Scaling Tab Limit Scale Factor Scale Factor Lines Tab Material Border Boundary Condition Labels Tab Line End Point Markers Font Tab 4 4 1 2 Temperature Style Description If this option is activated then the results will be displayed in accordance with the scale set in the scale factor group as long as the result object area is big enough Otherwise a smaller scale will automatically be used In this group you define the maximum scale for the results display If it is not possible to display the result with this scale in the result object area then the scale will be automatically adjusted This setting group determines the properties of the line which surrounds the material borders color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm This setting group determines the properties of boundary condition lines color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm This setting group determines the characteristics of label lines color style size and type Note that some of the lines cannot be shown when their thickness exceeds 0 394 mm Here you can set how the end of label lines loo
339. ystem As soon as the you release the mouse button the zero point is moved note the adjusted settings in the rulers by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 ziirich www infomind ch 21 by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Part Ill by infomind gmbh weberstrasse 10 ch 8004 z rich www infomind ch Tutorials 3 Tutorials The following tutorials will help you to get to know our product In each tutorial a file is generated in individual steps whereby the results are available as flixo pro files You can either perform the procedures yourself or just read the text watch the tutorial film and examine the results The individual steps are illustrated with help of short films tutorials were created using version 6 The colors and the look amp feel of the user interface of your program version differs slightly from those in the films A browser settings must allow the showing of Flash films in order to view them Basic Techniques This tutorial illustrates the entry of a simple model with flixo pro the definition of materials the assignment of boundary conditions and the generation of a report Advanced Techniques After having acquired the basic techniques this tutorial explains the entry of more complex constructions This example explains how to generate of a window model from individual components DXF Import In this tutorial another flixO pro application is explained Thi

flixo manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents